JP2020116203A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can enhance an appeal for a player.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 5C that includes: a panel plate 1110B for a flat plate-like opaque game panel 1100 having light transmissivity and provided with a game area where a game ball circulates forward; a panel decorative board 1170 installed backward of the panel plate 1110B and mounted with LED 1171 capable of radiating light forward in accordance with progress of a game; and a back face sheet 1160 provided between the panel decorative board 1170 and the panel plate 1110B.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 176

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plywood of veneer board is known as a flat game panel provided with a game area in which a game medium flows in front. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, the view behind the game area is blocked by the plywood game panel, and the front-back view is defined by the front of the game panel. There was a risk that I would feel it and reduce the interest in the game.

On the other hand, a game panel using a transparent synthetic resin plate has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). According to the technique of Patent Document 1, the rear can be seen through the game panel, so that the oppressive feeling given to the player can be alleviated, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

However, in recent years, many gaming machines have been proposed in which the gaming panel is made transparent as in Patent Document 1, so even if the gaming panel is made transparent, it looks the same as other gaming machines and has a vivid alternative appearance. It was difficult to increase the appeal to players by not doing so.

JP, 2016-220890, A

Therefore, in view of the above situation, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing appeal to a player.

Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A transparent opaque flat game panel provided with a game area in which a game medium flows in front,
A light emitting means provided behind the game panel and capable of irradiating light forward according to the progress of the game,
It is provided with a projection body provided between the light emitting means and the game panel."

Here, as the "gaming area", there is an entrance (for example, a starting opening, a variable starting opening, etc.) in which a special lottery is carried out to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player gains an advantage by receiving a game medium. "Area in which is provided", "A reception opening to which a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given by receiving the game medium (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a big winning opening, a prize winning opening, a V winning opening) , Etc.)” and the like.

Further, the "gaming panel" includes "one made of a plate material", "a flat panel plate and a frame-shaped panel holder holding the outer periphery of the panel plate". , And the like. Further, as the "game panel", a plate material may be cut, or may be injection molded. Further, as the “game panel”, a portion (specific portion) having different light transmittance may be provided in a portion corresponding to the projection body or a part of the projection body.

In addition, as an opaque "gaming panel" having translucency, "the whole including the inside is opaque", "the part of the inside is opaque", "the inside is transparent and at least one side is opaque" "A transparent material, a transparent material and an opaque synthetic resin bonded together", "a transparent board and a transparent opaque board bonded together", and "at least one of transparent boards" "Transparent opaque film (cell) attached to the surface", "Transparent plate rear surface treated with UV-curing ink on the surface", "Transparent plate rear surface sandblasting" And the like.” and the like.

Furthermore, "gaming panels" include "white ones such as milky white", "red ones", "blue ones", "yellow ones", "mixed color ones" (multiple "A specific color is mixed into a single color)", "Multicolored ones (each color is dispersed in a state such as spotted pattern, striped pattern, polka dot pattern, geometric pattern, etc.) , And the like.

Further, as the “translucent opaque”, it is desirable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. If the transmittance is lower than this, the amount of light transmitted from the rear to the front decreases, and the shadow of the projection object due to the light emission of the light emitting means becomes too dark, so that the effect of the projection object cannot be sufficiently exerted. This is because if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain it as an opaque material. Further, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the projection body provided in the rear can be easily recognized, and the effect of hiding the game panel as described later may not be sufficiently obtained. Is.

In addition, as materials for the "gaming panel", "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", "polyethylene", "polypropylene", “Glass” and the like can be mentioned.

Furthermore, examples of the “light emitting means” include “LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent lamp”, “fluorescent lamp”, “neon lamp”, “cold cathode tube”, “liquid crystal display device”, and the like. Further, as the "light emitting means", "for illuminating a game panel (projection body) with light", "for illuminating a decorative body as a projection body with light", and "thin performance display device ( For example, a backlight of a liquid crystal display device” and the like.

Further, "according to the progress of the game" means that "the game medium that has been struck by the player in the game area is an entrance provided in the game area (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a big winning prize). In response to acceptance of the game medium into the mouth, the prize winning hole, the V winning hole, etc.)", "the game medium driven by the player into the game area is a specific area provided in the game area ( For example, in response to having passed through a gate, a warp passage, a stage, etc.", "A game medium that has been driven into the game area by a player is an entrance (for example, a start opening provided in the game area. ) In accordance with the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance to the ")", "The game medium entered by the player into the game area is accepted into the entrance (for example, the start opening) provided in the game area. According to the type of production (for example, reach production, jackpot production, lost production, etc.) for suggesting the special lottery result that was drawn by lottery, "depending on the amount of game media that is driven into the game area "," "according to the length of the blank into which the game medium is driven into the game area", and the like.

Furthermore, examples of the "projection body" include "a plane object", "a three-dimensional relief object", and the like. Further, as the “projection body”, a predetermined pattern (for example, a character, an item, a logo, a pattern, etc.) may be applied, or a pattern may not be applied, and the outer shape has a predetermined shape ( For example, it may be formed into a character, item, logo, pattern, or the like). Furthermore, the “projection body” may be colored and transparent, colored and opaque, or opaque.

Further, as the "projector", "thing which is in contact with the rear surface of the game panel", "thing which is separated from the rear surface of the game panel and cannot be moved", and "which is separated from the rear surface of the game panel "Moveable according to the progress", "Those that are apart from the rear surface of the game panel and can display a predetermined effect image according to the progress of the game (for example, a liquid crystal panel of a liquid crystal display device)", etc. Are listed.

According to the structure of the means 1, the game machine is provided in the rear of the game panel, and a transparent opaque flat panel-shaped game panel in which a game area in which the game medium flows is provided in the front. The present invention is provided with a light emitting means capable of irradiating light forward according to the progress, and a projection body provided between the light emitting means and the game panel ([Mode for carrying out the invention]. Then, refer to the chapter of [10. Fourth embodiment of game board], FIG. 176, etc.).

As a result, since the game panel in which the game area in which the game medium flows is provided is opaque and transparent, light from the LED and the effect display device provided in the game machine, the game machine When the light from the lighting in the game hall where is installed, light from other game machines, etc. is applied to the game panel, the light diffuses in the opaque game panel, resulting in a thin game panel. You can make it appear to be bright and self-luminous. Therefore, as compared with the conventional gaming machines that use plywood or a transparent plate as the gaming panel, it is possible to show the gaming machine that emits light in the gaming area, which has never been seen before, to the player. A player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a gaming machine with a high appeal to the player can be provided.

In addition, since the game panel is opaque with a light-transmitting property, when the light emitting means provided behind the game panel and the projection body is not emitting light (normal state), projection is performed by the opaque game panel. Since the body and the light emitting means are invisible from the front, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the projection body and the light emitting means. Then, when the light emitting means is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the light from the light emitting means causes the shadow of the projection body to be projected (projected) on the game panel, so that the game panel having a light transmitting property is used. The shadow of the projection body can be visually recognized by the player, and the game panel can be made to emit light so as to have light and dark. In this way, since the shadow of the projection body is projected behind the game area, the shadow can be used to decorate the inside of the game area, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and it is strong against the player. It is possible to give an impact and to attract the player's interest strongly. Also, the shadow of the projection body, which is not visible in the normal state, can be viewed by the light from the light emitting means that emits light in accordance with the progress of the game, so there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make people think of it, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the projection body is provided between the game panel and the light emitting means, when the projection body is made movable or deformable according to the progress of the game, it is projected on the game panel by the light from the light emitting means. Since the shadow of the projection object can be moved or deformed, the player can be greatly surprised, and the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, the state of the "big hit" game) It is possible to strongly think that it may occur, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest.

By the way, when the game panel is made transparent as in Patent Document 1, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game panel. Therefore, when viewed in the game area, a decorative body or the like provided behind the game panel. Since the focus will be on, it becomes difficult for some players to focus on the game medium circulating in front of the game panel, and it may be difficult to see the game medium, which may reduce interest in the game. is there. On the other hand, according to this configuration, as described above, the game panel is in a state in which it is self-luminous by light from the outside or the like, or the game panel is caused to emit light by the light from the light emitting means, Since the game medium circulating in the game area can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear game panel, it is easy to visually recognize the game medium circulating in the game area. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game medium and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, since the game medium in the game area can be easily viewed, it is possible to make fine adjustment of the driving strength of the game medium, and the operation of driving the game medium. It is possible to entertain the original game of a gaming machine that devises.

In addition, since the game panel is made of opaque and transparent (synthetic resin), it is possible to use a lower grade synthetic resin compared to the case where the game panel is transparent. The cost of the machine can be reduced.

In addition, since the game panel is opaque, the roots of multiple obstacle nails (portions inserted into the game panel) that are planted in the game panel cannot be seen from the player side, as compared to the case where the game panel is transparent. It is possible to improve the appearance of the game area.

Furthermore, since the game panel is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing for hiding the wiring and the like behind the game panel. In other words, in a transparent game panel, in order to improve the appearance, it is necessary to hide the wiring behind the game panel, but with this configuration, the wiring behind the game panel is hidden because the game panel is opaque. The process of hiding is unnecessary. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel is made transparent, it is necessary to separately provide a member for hiding the wiring and the like behind the game panel, and devise the routing of the wiring so that it is hard to see. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In addition, it is desirable that the game panel is white and opaque. As a result, the inside of the game area can be made bright and the game medium circulating in the game area can be easily seen.

Further, as described above, when the game panel is made white and opaque, when the light emitting means provided at the rear of the game panel is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, its emission color or coloring The color of the projected object can be transmitted to the front, which makes it possible to entertain the player with a colorful light emission effect and at the same time present a variety of light emission effects to the player, making the player tired. It can be made difficult and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when the game panel is white, the color of the decorative body provided in the gaming machine can be relatively noticeable, so that the decorative effect of the decorative body can be strongly exerted. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high appeal that can attract the player's interest strongly. In addition, since the game panel is white, when a protective sheet with a pattern is attached to the front of the game panel, it is possible to improve the coloring of the pattern on the protective sheet, and the protective sheet The decoration effect can be surely exhibited.

Further, as described above, when the game panel is white, the projection body provided behind the game panel is made of a colorless transparent or white material, or a decorative substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted. When the front surface is formed in white, the color of the projector and the decorative substrate can be made invisible from the front because the color of the projector and the decoration board is the same as the color of the game panel because the game panel is white. The presence of the substrate can be obscured. Then, when the light emitting means of the decoration board is made to emit light, the shadow of the projection body is projected on the game panel as described above, so that the projection body can be seen through the game panel. By noticing the existence, it is possible to surprise the player to a great extent and to make the player strongly think that the opportunity has come, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect with a higher effect of the effect. You can entertain and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the projection body may be formed of a sheet material. As a result, the weight of the projector can be relatively reduced, and an increase in the weight of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, in this case, since the projection body is formed of a sheet material, by making the projection body planar, the space in the front-rear direction necessary for disposing the projection body in the game machine can be made as small as possible. Therefore, in the rear of the game panel, it is possible to easily secure a space for relatively arranging other members (for example, the effect device, the effect display device, etc.), and show the player various effects. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of playing.

Further, as described above, when the projection body is formed of a sheet material, the projection body can be lightened. Therefore, when the projection body can be moved according to the progress of the game, the projection body can be made with a small force (energy). Since it is possible to move the projector, it is possible to use a small drive source such as a drive motor or solenoid for moving the projection body with a small output, and to make the space required for driving relatively small. In addition to this, an inexpensive drive source can be used. Further, since the projection body can be lightened, the projection body can be supported even by the support mechanism having a relatively low rigidity, and the support mechanism for the projection body can be easily downsized (space saving), and The support mechanism can be inexpensive. From this, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members, and by arranging the other members, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects and entertain the player, and the present game machine The cost can be reduced.

Further, the projection body may be formed in a flat shape so as to contact the rear surface of the game panel. Thereby, the space in the front-rear direction necessary for disposing the projection body in the game machine can be made as small as possible. Therefore, in the rear of the game panel (projection body), it is possible to easily secure a space for relatively arranging other members (for example, an effect device, an effect display device, etc.), and a more diverse effect is provided to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be shown and enjoyed, and it is possible to make the projection body inexpensive and reduce the cost of the gaming machine.

Further, the projection body may be formed in a three-dimensional shape. As a result, if the projection body has a light-transmitting property, the light from the light emitting means causes a shade to appear in the shadow of the projection body projected on the game panel, and the decoration of the projection body can be shown to the player. , It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, as described above, when the projection body is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the game panel has an opening penetrating in the front and back, and the projection body is retracted from the front by the game panel so as not to be visible. It is desirable to be movable between the position and the appearance position visible from the front through the opening according to the progress of the game. As a result, when the projection body is in the retracted position, it is invisible from the front due to the opaque game panel, so that the shadow of the projection body is not projected on the game panel when the light emitting means is not emitting light. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the projection body. In this state, when the light emitting means is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the shadow of the projection body is projected (projected) on the game panel by the light from the light emitting means, and thus the game panel having a light transmitting property. The shadow of the projection object can be shown to the player through the game, and the existence of the projection object can be indirectly recognized by the player, and the shadow of the projection object is projected on the game panel to play the game. The player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Then, according to the progress of the game, if the projection body is moved to the appearance position where it is visible from the front through the opening, the projection body can be seen directly through the opening, which can greatly amaze the player, Not only can it give a strong impact to the player, but it can also make the player think that there is something good, and increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. You can

In addition, as described above, when the projection body is movable between the retracted position and the appearance position, the decoration mode of the game panel by the shadow of the projection body projected on the game panel by the light from the light emitting means at the retracted position And the decoration mode of the projection body itself may be different. Specifically, for example, when the outer shape of the projection body is set to the shape of the initial form of the predetermined character and the pattern of the final form of the character is applied to the front surface of the projection body, the light emitting means is used at the retracted position. Since the initial form of the character is projected on the game panel by the light, it is possible for the player to recognize the existence of the ornamental body (projection body) of the character in the initial form. Then, when the projection body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position in accordance with the progress of the game, contrary to the expectation that the character in the initial form will appear, the character in the final form will appear. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, and it is possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous game state will be generated, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, a protection sheet attached to the front surface of the game panel may be further provided. As a result, the protective sheet can protect the game panel from the game medium circulating in the game area. Therefore, it becomes possible to use an inexpensive material having low wear resistance as a material for the game panel, and it is possible to reduce the cost for the game machine.

In addition, as described above, when the protective sheet is attached to the front surface of the game panel, a predetermined pattern is applied to the protective sheet, so that the game area can be decorated with the pattern. The appearance of the machine can be improved and the appeal to the player can be increased.

Further, as described above, when the protective sheet is attached to the front surface of the game panel, a predetermined pattern corresponding to the projection body may be applied to the protective sheet. Specifically, for example, when the shadow of the projection body due to the light from the light emitting means is projected onto a portion of the protective sheet excluding the characteristic portion of the pattern, the light emitting means may not emit light. , The pattern of the protective sheet can be shown with the same brightness as a whole, and when the light emitting means is made to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the shadow of the projecting body due to the light from the light emitting means causes the characteristic of the pattern of the protective sheet. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high appeal that can brighten (shine) various parts and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, the game panel may be provided with a specific portion having a light transmittance different from that of the main body portion in the main body portion provided with the game area in the front. The "specific portion" includes "a portion made of the same material as the main body but having a different thickness (a portion having a different thickness in the main body)", "a portion made of the same material as the main body and having a different thickness (in the main body (A part with different thickness) and a transparent part", "materials with different light transmittance from the main part are placed by filling, insert molding, two-color molding, etc. "The part that exists" and the like. As a result, the light from the light emitting means provided at the rear makes it possible to show the light and shade of the light due to the shadow of the projection body on the game panel, and also the light is transmitted due to the difference in the light transmittance between the main body portion and the specific portion. You can show the shade. At this time, the decoration effect can be further enhanced by associating the light and shade of light due to the shadow of the projection body and the light and shade of light by the specific portion with each other.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The game panel is
It is characterized by being white and opaque.

Here, as "white color system", "milky white Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)", "white Munsell value (N 9.5)", and "powder color Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2)" /0.5)”, “Urban color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)”, “Production color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)”, “Lead white Munsell value (N 9)”, “Oyster white Munsell value” (5GY 8.5/0.3)”, “Gray white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)”, “White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)”, “Secret color Munsell Value (2B 8.5/2)", "ivory Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "cherry Munsell Value (10 RP 9/2.5)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the game panel is made white and opaque (see the description regarding the panel plate 1110B in [Mode for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, since the game panel provided with the game area in front is white, it is possible to make the inside of the game area appear bright and to easily see the game medium circulating in the game area.

In addition, since the game panel is opaque in white, when the light emitting means provided behind the game panel is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, its emission color and the color of the colored projection body , Can be transmitted to the front, which can entertain the player with a colorful light emission effect, and can also present a variety of light emission effects to the player, making the player less likely to get bored and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the game panel is white-based, the color of the decorative body provided in the game machine can be relatively conspicuous, so that the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exerted strongly, and the player It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player. In addition, since the game panel is white, when a protective sheet with a pattern is attached to the front of the game panel, it is possible to improve the coloring of the pattern on the protective sheet, and the protective sheet The decoration effect can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the game panel is white, the projection body provided at the rear of the game panel is made of a colorless transparent or white material, or the front surface of the decorative substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted is white. When formed, since the game panel is white, the colors of the projection body and the decorative board can be made invisible from the front by assimilating the colors of the game panel, and the presence of the projection body and the decoration board for the player You can make it go unnoticed. Then, when the light emitting means of the decoration board is made to emit light, the shadow of the projection body is projected on the game panel as described above, so that the projection body can be seen through the game panel. By noticing the existence, it is possible to surprise the player to a great extent and to make the player strongly think that the opportunity has come, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect with a higher effect of the effect. You can entertain and suppress a decline in interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The projection is
It is formed of a sheet material”.

Here, as the "sheet material", "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin" Sheet-like materials such as "," "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

Further, the "projection body" formed of the sheet material includes "those formed in a plane shape", "three-dimensional relief shape formed by pressure forming or vacuum forming", and "bending or bending". "Three-dimensionally formed by being curved or the like".

According to the configuration of the means 3, the projection body is formed of the sheet material (in the [Description of Embodiments], refer to the description regarding the rear sheet 1160).

As a result, since the projection body is formed of a sheet material, the projection body can be made relatively lighter, and an increase in the weight of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, since the projection body is formed of a sheet material, by making the projection body flat, the space in the front-rear direction necessary for disposing the projection body in the game machine can be made as small as possible. , Behind the game panel, it is possible to easily secure a space for relatively arranging other members (for example, effect device, effect display device, etc.), and it is possible to show a variety of effects to the player. It is possible to provide an amusement machine.

Also, since the projection body is made of a sheet material, the projection body can be made lighter. Therefore, when the projection body can be moved as the game progresses, the projection body can be moved with a small force (energy). Since it becomes possible to use a small drive source such as a drive motor or solenoid for moving the projection body, which has a small output, it is possible to relatively reduce the space required for driving. In addition, an inexpensive drive source can be used. Further, since the projection body can be lightened, the projection body can be supported even by the support mechanism having a relatively low rigidity, and the support mechanism for the projection body can be easily downsized (space saving), and The support mechanism can be inexpensive. From this, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members, and by arranging the other members, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects and entertain the player, and the present game machine The cost can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 3,
"The projection is
It is formed in a flat shape so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the game panel”.

Here, as the contact with the rear surface of the game panel, it may be attached to the rear surface of the game panel, or may be in contact with the rear surface of the game panel without being attached.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the projection body is formed in a flat shape so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the game panel (see [Description of Rear Sheet 1160 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]). ..

As a result, the planar projection formed of the sheet material is in contact with the rear surface of the game panel, so that the space in the front-rear direction necessary for disposing the projection in the game machine is minimized. be able to. Therefore, in the rear of the game panel (projection body), it is possible to easily secure a space for relatively arranging other members (for example, an effect device, an effect display device, etc.), and a more diverse effect is provided to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be shown and enjoyed, and it is possible to make the projection body inexpensive and reduce the cost of the gaming machine.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The projection is
It has a three-dimensional shape”.

Here, examples of the "three-dimensional shape" include "those formed in a relief shape", "those obtained by bending or bending a sheet material", and the like. In addition, as the “projection body” formed in a three-dimensional shape, “a three-dimensional model of a character that conforms to the concept of a gaming machine” and “a three-dimensional model of an item that conforms to the concept of a gaming machine” "Three-dimensionally imitating backgrounds and scenes in line with the game machine concept", "Three-dimensional logos and serifs in line with the game machine concept", "Three-dimensional pattern" Things”, and the like.

The three-dimensional "projector" may be immovable or may be movable as the game progresses.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the projection body is formed into a three-dimensional shape (see [1745] to [1753] in [Description of Embodiments].

As a result, since the projection body has a three-dimensional shape, if the projection body is made to have a light-transmitting property, the light from the light emitting means causes a shade to appear in the shadow of the projection body projected on the game panel, and The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Means 6: In the configuration of Means 5,
"The game panel is
It has an opening that penetrates back and forth,
The projection body is
According to the progress of the game, it is possible to move between a retracted position that is not visible from the front by the game panel and an appearance position that is visible from the front by the opening.” ..

Here, as the "opening" of the game panel, "one in which a frame-shaped center accessory is attached", "one in which a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate is attached", and "reproduction provided behind the game panel" The one that makes it possible to visually recognize the effect image displayed on the display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) from the front".

Further, the “light emitting means” may be movable together with the projection body from the retracted position to the appearance position, or may be immovable at a position behind the projection body at the retracted position.

According to the structure of the means 6, the game panel has an opening penetrating forward and backward, and the projection body can be visually recognized from the front by the retracted position and the opening which cannot be visually recognized by the game panel from the front. It is configured such that it can be moved between different appearance positions according to the progress of the game (see [1750] and [1751] in [Description of Embodiments].

As a result, when the projection body is in the retracted position, it is invisible from the front due to the opaque game panel, so that the shadow of the projection body is not projected on the game panel when the light emitting means is not emitting light. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the projection body. In this state, when the light emitting means is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the shadow of the projection body is projected (projected) on the game panel by the light from the light emitting means, and thus the game panel having a light transmitting property. The shadow of the projection object can be shown to the player through the game, and the existence of the projection object can be indirectly recognized by the player, and the shadow of the projection object is projected on the game panel to play the game. The player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Then, according to the progress of the game, when the projection body is moved to the appearance position where it is visible from the front through the opening, the projection body can be directly seen through the opening, which can greatly amaze the player, Not only can it give a strong impact to the player, but it can also make the player think that there is something good, and increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. You can

It should be noted that the decoration mode of the game panel by the shadow of the projection body projected on the game panel by the light from the light emitting means at the retracted position may be different from the decoration mode of the projection body itself. Specifically, for example, when the outer shape of the projection body is set to the shape of the initial form of the predetermined character and the pattern of the final form of the character is applied to the front surface of the projection body, the light emitting means is used at the retracted position. Since the initial form of the character is projected on the game panel by the light, it is possible for the player to recognize the existence of the ornamental body (projection body) of the character in the initial form. Then, when the projection body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position in accordance with the progress of the game, contrary to the expectation that the character in the initial form will appear, the character in the final form will appear. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, and it is possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous game state will be generated, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Means 7: In any one of the means 1 to 6,
"The protective sheet attached to the front of the game panel,
It is further equipped”.

Here, as the "protective sheet", "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin" Sheet-like materials such as "," "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

Further, the "protection sheet" may be provided with a predetermined pattern, may be transparent or may have a single color.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is further provided with a protection sheet attached to the front surface of the gaming panel (in [Mode for carrying out the invention], paragraph [1728] and (See description in [1748]).

Thus, since the protective sheet is attached to the front surface of the game panel, the protective sheet can protect the game panel from the game medium circulating in the game area. Therefore, it becomes possible to use an inexpensive material having low wear resistance as a material for the game panel, and it is possible to reduce the cost for the game machine.

Further, since the protective sheet is attached to the front surface of the game panel, by providing a predetermined pattern on the protective sheet, it is possible to decorate the inside of the game area with the pattern, which makes the gaming machine look good. It can be improved and the appeal to the player can be increased.

Note that the protective sheet attached to the front surface of the game panel may be provided with a predetermined pattern corresponding to the projection body. Specifically, for example, when the shadow of the projection body due to the light from the light emitting means is projected onto a portion of the protective sheet excluding the characteristic portion of the pattern, the light emitting means may not emit light. , The pattern of the protective sheet can be shown with the same brightness as a whole, and when the light emitting means is made to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the shadow of the projecting body due to the light from the light emitting means causes the characteristic of the pattern of the protective sheet. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high appeal that can brighten (shine) various parts and strongly attract the player's interest.

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"A game area in which a game medium flows is provided in the front, and has an opening penetrating in the front and back, and a translucent white opaque flat panel game panel,
A light emitting means provided behind the game panel and capable of irradiating light forward according to the progress of the game,
The game panel is provided between the light emitting means and the game panel and can be moved between a retracted position invisible from the front by the game panel and an appearance position visible from the front by the opening according to the progress of the game. Or a projection body formed in a flat shape by a sheet material so as to contact the rear surface of the game panel,
And a protective sheet attached to the front surface of the game panel."

According to the configuration of the means 8, the game machine is provided with the game area in which the game medium flows in the front, and has the opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction. An opaque flat game panel and a light emitting means provided behind the game panel and capable of emitting light forward as the game progresses, and a game panel provided between the light emitting means and the game panel. It is movable according to the progress of the game between a retracted position that is not visible from the front and an appearance position that is visible from the front due to the opening, or is flat with a sheet material so as to contact the rear surface of the game panel. And a protective sheet attached to the front surface of the game panel.

As a result, the game panel in which the game area in which the game medium is distributed is provided in the front is made of an opaque and opaque white system, so that the inside of the game area can be made bright and the game medium in the game area is distributed. It is possible to make it easy to see, and the light from the LED and effect display device etc. provided in this game machine, the light from the lighting etc. in the game hall where this game machine is installed, from other game machines When the game panel is irradiated with the light, etc., the light is diffused in the game panel, so that the game panel can be made to appear to be light and self-luminous. Therefore, as compared with the conventional gaming machines that use plywood or a transparent plate as the gaming panel, it is possible to show the gaming machine that emits light in the gaming area, which has never been seen before, to the player. A player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a gaming machine with a high appeal to the player can be provided.

In addition, since the game panel is opaque with a light-transmitting property, when the light emitting means provided behind the game panel and the projection body is not emitting light (normal state), projection is performed by the opaque game panel. Since the body and the light emitting means are invisible from the front, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the projection body and the light emitting means. If the light emitting means is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game from this normal state, the shadow of the projection body is projected (projected) on the game panel by the light from the light emitting means, and thus the game having a light-transmitting property. The player can visually recognize the shadow of the projection body through the panel, and the game panel can be caused to emit light so as to have light and dark. At this time, since the game panel is made white and opaque, the light emission color of the light emitting means and the color of the projection body can be transmitted to the front, and the player can enjoy the colorful light emission effect. It is possible to present a variety of light emitting effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. In this way, since the shadow of the projection body is projected behind the game area, the shadow can be used to decorate the inside of the game area, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and it is strong against the player. It is possible to give an impact and to attract the player's interest strongly. Also, the shadow of the projection body, which is not visible in the normal state, can be viewed by the light from the light emitting means that emits light in accordance with the progress of the game, so there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make people think of it, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the game panel can be in a state where it is self-luminous by the light from the outside or the game panel can be made to emit light by the light from the light emitting means, so that the game area Since the game medium circulating in the can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear game panel, the game medium circulating in the game area can be easily seen and the movement of the game medium can be improved. You can entertain and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since it is possible to make the game medium in the game area easy to see, it is possible to easily make a fine adjustment of the driving force of the game medium, and a game machine for devising a game medium driving operation. You can entertain the original game.

Furthermore, since the projection body is formed of a sheet material, the projection body can be made relatively lighter, and an increase in the weight of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, since the projection body is formed in a flat shape by a sheet material so as to contact the rear surface of the game panel, the space in the front-rear direction necessary for disposing the projection body in the game machine can be made as small as possible. .. Therefore, in the rear of the game panel (projection body), it is possible to easily secure a space for relatively arranging other members (for example, an effect device, an effect display device, etc.), and a more diverse effect is provided to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be shown and enjoyed, and it is possible to make the projection body inexpensive and reduce the cost of the gaming machine.

Further, since the projection body is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the game panel allows the player to move between the retracted position, which cannot be seen from the front by the game panel, and the appearance position, which can be seen from the front by the opening, depending on the progress of the game. , When the projection body is in the retracted position, it is invisible from the front due to the opaque game panel, so the shadow of the projection body is not projected on the game panel when the light emitting means is not emitting light, so the game It is possible to make it difficult for a person to notice the presence of the projection body. In this state, when the light emitting means is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the shadow of the projection body is projected (projected) on the game panel by the light from the light emitting means, and thus the game panel having a light transmitting property. The shadow of the projection object can be shown to the player through the game, and the existence of the projection object can be indirectly recognized by the player, and the shadow of the projection object is projected on the game panel to play the game. The player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Then, according to the progress of the game, if the projection body is moved to the appearance position where it is visible from the front through the opening, the projection body can be seen directly through the opening, which can greatly amaze the player, It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to strongly think that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a "big hit" game state) occurs, It is possible to raise expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the game panel is made of opaque and transparent (synthetic resin), it is possible to use a lower grade synthetic resin compared to the case where the game panel is transparent. The cost of the machine can be reduced.

In addition, since the game panel is opaque, the roots of multiple obstacle nails (portions inserted into the game panel) that are planted in the game panel cannot be seen from the player side, as compared to the case where the game panel is transparent. It is possible to improve the appearance of the game area.

Further, since the game panel is white, the color of the decoration provided on the gaming machine can be relatively noticeable, so that the decoration effect of the decoration can be strongly exerted, and the player It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player. In addition, since the game panel is white, when a protective sheet with a pattern is attached to the front of the game panel, it is possible to improve the coloring of the pattern on the protective sheet, and the protective sheet The decoration effect can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the protective sheet attached to the front surface of the game panel is provided, the protective sheet can protect the game panel from the game medium circulating in the game area. Therefore, it becomes possible to use an inexpensive material having low wear resistance as a material for the game panel, and it is possible to reduce the cost for the game machine.

Further, since the game panel is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing for hiding the wiring and the like behind the game panel. In other words, in a transparent game panel, in order to improve the appearance, it is necessary to hide the wiring behind the game panel, but with this configuration, the wiring behind the game panel is hidden because the game panel is opaque. The process of hiding is unnecessary. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel is made transparent, it is necessary to separately provide a member for hiding the wiring and the like behind the game panel, and devise the routing of the wiring so that it is hard to see. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Means 9: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 8,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of game media are provided in the game area so that the game media can be received, and a pachinko machine having a receiving opening from which a predetermined number of game media are paid out from the payout device according to the reception of the game media. And

Here, the "reception opening" is "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area", "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium. Starting prize hole (starting opening) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate "the game medium is received in a specific inlet (chucker) in the game area, Variable winning opening that can be accepted (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.)", "Ordinary symbol that is drawn by the game medium passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area According to the result of lottery, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept a game medium", "play a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the playing area Depending on the drawing result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by passing through the medium, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery for whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the game medium is favored by the acceptance of the game medium "Variable start winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winnings that generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage when the game medium accepted in the winning prize winning portion is sorted and accepted by the sorting means. "Mouth", "As an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage, a big winning opening or a winning prize opening in which a game medium can be received by opening and closing in a predetermined pattern" and the like can be mentioned.

Also, as a "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which the player receives an advantage by receiving the game medium into the starting port, and a special symbol drawn by the lottery means Special lottery result display means and special lottery result display means for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol that has been randomly selected by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols after the special symbol is variably displayed according to the lottery result In the advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the special symbol lottery result for generating the advantageous game state is displayed (what is called a digital patch machine )”, “A distribution means for distributing the game media received in the prize winning opening, and when the game media distributed by the distributing means is received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous (a so-called honey machine), "a game with a large winning opening and a winning prize opening, and a starting opening Depending on the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the medium, the special winning opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game medium accepted in the winning prize is distributed to the V winning opening. The one provided with an advantageous game state generation means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing the prize winning opening or the special winning opening (a so-called multi-function peripheral)", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 9, a plurality of game machines are provided in the game area so that the game media can be received, and a receiving opening from which a predetermined number of game media are paid out from the payout device according to the reception of the game media, It is a pachinko machine equipped with. With this, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-described means.

It should be noted that it is desirable that the effect of causing the shadow of the projection body to be projected on the game panel by the light emission of the light emitting means (light emission effect) is executed by the game medium that has been driven into the game area being received at the receiving port. As a result, when a game medium is received at the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and in addition, the effect of projecting the shadow of the projection body on the game panel is executed, so that the player can enjoy the game medium. It is possible to easily continue the driving of the game medium aiming at the entrance, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, when a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by accepting the game medium into the starting opening, and when the player is informed of the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the player As one of the effects presented to, the shadow of the projection body may be projected on the game panel. As a result, by projecting the shadow of the projection body on the game panel, it is possible to entertain a strong impact on the player with the above-described effects, so that a lottery of special symbols drawn for the player The result can be considered to be one in which an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs (for example, "big hit"), and an increase in expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous game state to suppress a decrease in interest. be able to. Further, as described above, by projecting the shadow of the projecting body on the game panel, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect with a higher effect, so that the player is informed of the lottery result of the special symbol that has been drawn. It can be suitably used for the effect (for example, reach effect), and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing appeal to a player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back front, (c) is the cylinder in the conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 34A is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A as seen from the rear. is there. 34A is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A from the front, and FIG. 34B is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. FIG. 13C is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. FIG. 7A is an enlarged front view showing portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 7B is an enlarged perspective view showing portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and was seen from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the ii line in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the aer line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (A) is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects horizontally in the site|part of a lower dish ball supply opening in a door frame, and shows the principal part, (b) cut|disconnects the same part as (a) in the conventional door frame, and is a principal part. FIG. 4C is a cross-sectional view showing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate of the product of this embodiment and the product of the related art. It is a top view which expands and shows the site|part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front in the state which turned the production operation button upward, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit of (a) from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the front upper side. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the lower front. (A) is sectional drawing of the production|operation operation unit in the state of the production|operation operation part unit in a lowered position, and the raising/lowering spring holding member is a position of an upward moving end position, (b) is a production|operation operation part unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the production|operation production unit in the state which moved to the raising position. It is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in the state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the position of the moving end downward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect|action operation part outer peripheral decoration board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit unit is in the raised position. It is a plan view of the effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which connected several contact detection bodies to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and several contact detection bodies in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the switching part between typically, (c) shows the plate left decoration unit of a plate unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the production|operation operation unit etc. which can be moved back and forth in the front-back direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and back side, such as. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contact detection body which has decoration, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows another embodiment of a production|operation production unit typically. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is a door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the Woo line in FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. And (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE in FIG. 66( a ). FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-E in FIG. 66( a ). (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the two-color molded outer layer is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is the inner layer in (a) as it is and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 6 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view which shows each decoration board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the site|part of the production operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decoration board provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) disassembled and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area|region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site of a tank rail seeing from the back the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of a second embodiment. 106A is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106A seen from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail of a) from the back. 107A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 107B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the curve line in FIG. 107(a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 by a cross section. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site|part of the tank rail seeing the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment from the right back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site|part of a tank rail seeing from the left back the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal board, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 113A is a sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 113B, and FIG. 113B is a sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 113A. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in FIG.114(b). (A) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear side, and (c) is (a) ) Is a perspective view of the tank rail of FIG. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of FIG. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of FIG. (A) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board unit of (a) from the right front, and (c) is the board unit of (a) from the left front. It is the perspective view seen. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 119(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear side. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) is a sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 119(a), FIG. 119(b) is a sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 119(a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the cut line. It is a bottom view which shows the site|part behind a door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the board|substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example in which an out sensor is attachable and detachable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board unit of a third embodiment which abbreviate|omitted the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and (b) sees the board unit of (a) from the front left. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 127A is a plan view of the substrate unit shown in FIG. 127, FIG. 72B is a sectional view taken along the line XX in FIG. 127A, and FIG. FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the see-through line in FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as disassembled and seen from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows elimination of the ball clogging in the board|substrate unit of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prevention of the invasion of the linear illegal tool in the board|substrate unit of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows dust removal in the board|substrate unit of FIG. It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 7 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front by disassembling each main member of the game board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state in which a table unit is cut parallel to the surface of a game panel to show a game area in which a game ball flows and an obstacle nail. It is an expansion front view which expands and shows the left side of FIG. 145. It is an expansion front view which expands and shows the right side of FIG. 145. (A) is a front view which shows the right half of a front unit with a panel board and an obstacle nail, (b) is a perspective view which looked at (a) from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate taken apart from the front in FIG. 148, and (b) is the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate shown in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 15A is an exploded perspective view of the back box relation of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of the rear box relationship viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the rear. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the back under front decoration of the back under front production unit in the back unit and the back under back decoration of the back under back production unit have respectively moved to the raising position. In the back unit, the back lower front decoration of the back lower front effect unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back upper rear decoration of the back upper rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-under-rear decorative body of the back-under-rear effect unit is moving below the back-under front decorative body. In the state of FIG. 155, the front of the game board showing the state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back lower front decoration of the back lower front effect unit move to the open position and the central decoration appears. It is a figure. A state in which the back-up rear decoration of the back-up rear effect unit of the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back-up rear decoration of the back-down rear effect unit rises and is in contact with the back-up rear decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing. In the state of FIG. 157, the front of the game board showing a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back lower front decoration of the back lower front effect unit have moved to the open positions and the central decoration has appeared. It is a figure. In the back unit, the back-up front decorative body of the back-up front production unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back-up rear decorative body of the back-up rear production unit is moved to the back of the back-up front decoration body. The front decoration unit of the front production unit is moving up and moving to the lower side of the front decoration unit of the back production unit, and the rear decoration unit of the rear production unit of the rear production unit is rising and behind the front decoration unit of the back production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of being in contact with the rear upper decorative body. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment shown in a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the back. FIG. 16A is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guiding unit in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 162 as seen from the front, and FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 16A is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and FIG. 16B is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 16A is a sectional view taken along the soot line in FIG. 164, FIG. 16B is a sectional view taken along the sethe line in FIG. 164, and FIG. FIG. 16D is a cross-sectional view taken along line (d) of FIG. 164. FIG. 16A is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front left. It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. FIG. 16A is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the front constituent members, the game panel, and the panel decoration board in the game board of FIG. 167 are assembled, and FIG. 16B is a front constituent member and the game of the game board of FIG. 167. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state where the panel and the panel decoration board were assembled. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front with the front constituent members, the game panel, and the panel decoration board of the game board of FIG. 167 disassembled. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the front constituent member, the game panel, and the panel decoration board of the game board of FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing a relationship between a game panel and a panel decoration substrate, (a1) of (a) is an explanatory view seen from the front in a state where the LED of the panel decoration substrate is turned off, (a2) Is an explanatory view showing (a1) in cross section, (b1) of (b) is an explanatory view seen from the front in a state where the LED of the panel decoration substrate is turned on, and (b2) is (b1) It is explanatory drawing shown in a cross section. (A) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of a part of the game panel in which the specifying part having a different form from that of FIG. 171 is provided, and (b) is the specifying part having a different form. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of gaming panel which is present in a perspective view, and (c) is an explanatory drawing which shows the gaming panel in which the specific part of a different form is provided with a perspective view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel in which the specific part with which thickness was changed was provided with the panel decoration board in a cross section, (b) is the game in which the specific part with which the rear surface was made conical is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows a panel with a panel decoration board in a cross section, (c) shows the gaming panel in which the specific part which provided the light-shielding film was provided in the side surface of the blind hole-shaped recess with a panel decoration board in a cross section. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel in which the specific part which provided the light-shielding sleeve was provided in the blind hole-shaped recessed part with a panel decoration board in a cross section. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel in which the specific part formed of the groove-shaped recessed part is provided with a panel decoration substrate in a cross section, (b) is the game which provided the board|substrate accommodating recessed part which accommodates a panel decoration substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows a panel with a panel decoration board in a cross section, (c) is a game panel with which the specific part which filled the transparent material was provided in the recessed hole-shaped recessed part from the rear surface of a game panel with a panel decoration board. It is explanatory drawing shown in a cross section, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the game panel with which the specific part which filled the transparent material was provided in the recessed hole-shaped recessed part from the front of the game panel with a panel decoration board in a cross section. is there. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration board whose board thickness is changing, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship different from (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the panel board, the back surface sheet, and the panel decoration board in the game board of 4th embodiment, and was seen from the front.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position, as viewed from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 195 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, it is possible to entertain the player by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a power supply board 630 having a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power switch 630a capable of turning on the pachinko machine 1. And a back cover 640 attached to the body frame base 501 for covering the rear side of the game board 5, a locking unit 650 for locking the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. I have it.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. On the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. Peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) that is arranged, an effect display device 1600 that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to a game state.

Within the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B A general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Thus, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 195.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the lower right unit 2400, and the back unit. For example, a light emission effect or a movable effect is performed by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back front production unit 3300, the back front production unit 3400, the back production unit 3500, the back production unit 3600, and so on. Can entertain the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is brought into contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 contacts the horizontal fixing portion 12a with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a recessed portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left at a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 21a. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 allows the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c to be inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the right end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with a flat plate-like mounting portion 24a, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, which is disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and the front is open, and a ball biting prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position near the rear in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 by the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface, the curtain plate rear member 43 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side which is coincident with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and thus the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 due to the game ball B staying at the site of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball catching mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B easily stays on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally separated from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state such that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to communicate with each other through the gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46 b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the body frame speaker 622 are slanted by the plurality of slanting blade portions 46b, and the handle cover unit 290 is located diagonally above and forward. Through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 in the front cover 291 of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed. As a result, when the player thrusts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device for the game ball B), the main frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending the wind into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure released from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is released forward. Therefore, the port member 47 is also discharged to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to other players who are traveling around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The production sound can be heard, and the production sound can attract the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 provided in the body frame 4, it is possible to increase the volume of the enclosure 624. Therefore, it is possible to output a more deep bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame disassembled as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21A as seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 which is mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape, and extends upward from a front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extension portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and an edge extending from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extending from a rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the front left and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

The lock member 52, when attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, allows the lock body 52a to block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space for accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 195 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the vehicle, a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, The door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the upper side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and rear, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. In the rear view, the speaker duct 103 is mounted in the lower right corner, the door frame main relay board 104 is mounted in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. Door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the view, handle rear relay board 106 mounted on the left side of the rear side of the door frame sub relay board 105, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay A door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the substrate 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay substrate cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 operates the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, so that the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is released from the ball launch device. 540 is for playing a game that is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 the height of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42 and the like) that is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly ahead of the right end side. A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted by penetrating back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in front view left side. And a ball feeding opening 101e for penetrating the ball feeding unit 140 in the front and rear direction so as to face the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to the front.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates forward and backward at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located rearward. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, a sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangle extending vertically, and a portion extending vertically is formed. The door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the rear view left side. The door frame sub relay board 105 is a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422 and a door frame left side lower decoration board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top relay substrate of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portions extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (a portion that extends vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being open. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcement frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcement frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114, which extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are vertically spaced apart from each other. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to a front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a that is square in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b that extends forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends horizontally against the urging force of the lock spring 124 downward, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1 g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotatable with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522 a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34A is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the cylinder lock as shown in FIG. 34A from the front and rear, and FIG. 34C is a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 6 as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a) as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) as seen from the back. It is a figure. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, and FIG. 36(b) is shown in a state rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees in a clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used to open and close the lock with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular cylinder inserted in the key hole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates with a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132, and the cylinder mounting frame 115. Of the second cam member 135 rotatably attached to a portion below the cylinder body 131 in the front-rear direction and an upper end portion of the first cam member 134 that rotates to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. And a lower end side of the second cam member 135 rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and a top end side of the first cam member 134. A strip plate-shaped second arm 137 rotatably attached at a portion below the center and a lower end side rotatably attached at a portion below the rotation center of the second cam member 135. ing.

Also, the cylinder lock 130 is a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133). A rivet that rotatably attaches the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. And 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmitting member 133 is integrally rotatably mounted on the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. In the second cam member 135, the lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about each rotation axis. doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a protruding outward from the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces in a cylindrical shape locked to the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side thereof is a screw (not shown). Thus, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In the cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmitting member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are formed of metal. ..

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIGS. 34C and 34D, the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of the cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are the center of rotation of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The second arm 137 is attached to the right side portion, and the upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively, below the respective rotation centers. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated by 90 degrees from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, let the first arm 136 rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. While the second arm 137 has the upper end side attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second arm 137 does not move the second cam member 135. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction hardly acts.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the counterclockwise direction. And the rotation transmitting member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by the rotation of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is due to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction between the rotation center of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas in the second arm 137 it acts upward. The power to do it increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force exerted upward by the second arm 137 is larger than that by the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise from the normal state by an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36B).

In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state to be rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state by the key inserted in the keyhole 132 through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131, the upper end side is located at the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to one side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 tries to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. The second arm 137 has its upper end mounted below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, whereas the second arm 137 rotates the second cam member 135 clockwise. The force to rotate in the direction of does not act.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. As a result, the rotation transmitting member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 are proportional to the distance in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, while In the arm 137, the force to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from the normal state by an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36C).

When a key is used to rotate 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state to rotate it 90 degrees in the clockwise direction to return to the normal state, the operation is performed in the opposite manner to the above. Will be done.

Thus, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are attached so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Since the rotation is transmitted by connecting at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 regardless of the rotation position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132). Thus, the rotation can be transmitted to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133), and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked or unlocked favorably.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder main body 131 (key hole 132) can be provided in a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, a cheating person who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By rotating the rotation transmitting member 133 illegally by the tool, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 is opened and a fraudulent act is performed. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axial center (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmitting member 133, the rotation transmitting member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, so the rotation transmitting member 133 cannot be rotated, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees, with respect to the first arm 136. A portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. You will be in a state of being Therefore, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135 by being positioned at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 by one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Even if the first cam member 134 cannot be transmitted, the rotation of the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a great resistance to the rotation, the unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole is forcibly rotated. It can be prevented that the key is damaged and the key can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. As a result, even if one arm is broken, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (band-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, in the case where the rotation is transmitted by the gear, there is a possibility that the gear is rotated and the rotation transmission member 133 is rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the tooth of the gear. Since the arms 136 and the second arms 137 have a rod shape with a smooth surface, it is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the tool to be caught in the first arms 136 and the second arms 137 and to move the first arms 136 and the second arms 137. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmitting member 133 from being rotated, and it is possible to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 from being unlocked by the lock unit 650 being illegally operated. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 uses the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. , But is not limited thereto, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , And so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the tamperproof member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened and a box-shaped game ball that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is opened in the front and enters from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball cover member 143 having a partition part 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 are rear-covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is placed on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are respectively arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240. Also, it is formed so as to close the rearward-opened portion of the upstream end side of the hollow guideway 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around a shaft extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bent in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction to the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extending in the front-rear direction. Of the rotary rod 143b rotatably supported on the rotary rod 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotary rod 143b, and a rotary rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-slipping slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-sledding button 222 of the dish unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a and at the same time the ball holding section 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b covers the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking section 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the side of the rod part 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip vertically swings by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which vertically swings in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and the ball feeding operation centering on the right end portion. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 145 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and engages with the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the side opposite to the side and rotatably supported around a shaft that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 160) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not enter.

Then, when the player presses down the upper bowl ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 on which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is separated by the partition portion 143a. Bounce can be prevented.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, and is attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed in which the illegal game ball B is put in and out of the first starting opening 2004 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B shot (struck) by the ball launch device 540 is The string attached to the illegal game ball B by momentum is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by a narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal gaming ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving passage 610b of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the main frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front side. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating sphere passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full-ball socket 150b and the foul-ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect, and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated to move the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be mounted on the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 from above. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be detached in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is separated left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end of the body portion 171 of the security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protruding piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The crime prevention cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. 41A is an enlarged front view showing the portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41B is an enlarged perspective view showing the portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 46, only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted is shown in a sectional view.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the dish unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player so that the game ball B in the upper dish 201 is moved. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, and a front end of the handle base 181. Handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 which will be described later, and a disc-like shape attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle mounted on the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 on the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a which rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 in a front view and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the protrusions 291d can be inserted into the three grooves 181c, respectively. Is inserted, the handle base 181 is in a state of being unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the ends of the portion 195b, and two outer peripheral ring portions 195c extending in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. The slit 195d and a locking protrusion 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and centered around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend in the counterclockwise direction from the portions having an angle of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend in such a length that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped round side facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plated portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even by turning the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a opened toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b extending from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. The three handle guides 196 have mounting stays 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is one at the center, three are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six are provided at constant intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10 The LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one at the center, three in the middle, two at the upper left of the outer circumference, two at the upper right of the outer circumference, and two at the lower side of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing the LEDs 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems and can control 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups in full color respectively, so that 15 groups of 3 systems per one group are controlled. I am trying.

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying electric power for driving the LEDs 184a and the LED drivers 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable composed of four electric wires is connected to the control signal line for receiving the signal such as "1" and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. When the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The ten LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of the LEDs 184a, which are larger than the number of electric wires forming the wiring cable to be connected, is individually (here, a group). The number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and is translucent. The front lens 185 of the handle has a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The front lens 185 of the handle is made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength according to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 195, and the player touches the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 by some method without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, the firing controller 633b of the payout control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and also the one-shot button. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 having a cover and a rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; and an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. An annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a that extends in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and the inner diameter becomes smaller from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a toward the front. An inner wall portion 291b, a cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c that penetrates through the middle wall portion 291b and extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and an inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. And a plurality of (here, three) protrusions 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tubular portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front tubular portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. And a guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front cylinder part 291a at a portion between the front end of the front cylinder part 291a and the flange part 291e. And an opening 291h penetrating the lower part of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape with a bulging outward. The rear end of the rear tubular portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181, and can be relatively unrotatable by being inserted into the groove portions 181c. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer tubular portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and three guide pieces 291g are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of an angle of 10 degrees. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 of the handle unit 180 is inserted rearward of the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g, and the handle 195 is rotated, whereby a U-shaped guide portion is formed. By positioning the guide piece 291g inside 196a, the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder 291a to the vicinity of the flange 291e, and has a size in the range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder 291a. ..

The inner 292 extends rearward from an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and an outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c that are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided in a circumferentially spaced manner. The front cylinder 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned behind the flange 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These twelve LEDs 293a are divided into 6 groups, that is, two on the lower left from the center, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, so that the 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can each be emitted in full color, so that the total of 18 systems including 3 systems for one group is controlled. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one is an earth wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and a command from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. There is. Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, it is divided into 6 groups according to the command. Also, the twelve LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. And a cylindrical side plate portion 294b having an outer peripheral edge extending short rearward. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at the front end that has the same inner shape as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and has a spindle base (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc., and a plurality of (four in this case) notch openings 295b are formed in the circumferential direction by notching from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two kinds of resins, that is, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is provided. A region on the rear side of the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are located on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291. It is attached to 101b.

A central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181. Further, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 at the outer peripheral ring portion 195c outside the central hub portion 195a by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front tubular portion 291a and the outer tubular portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the substrate cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have a light-transmitting property, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293 is made to emit light. Thus, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be illuminated and decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has the notch opening 295b and the notch 292c which are aligned with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side. A hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a can be made to appear as if it is open. This alleviates the mental anxiety for the player to thrust his or her hand (finger) into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. You can

The upper cutout opening 295b (upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) of the handle cover 295 is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h to the lower side of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295, respectively. It communicates with the cutout portion 292c and the cutout opening portion 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or the game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side Can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when the liquid or the game ball B enters into the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the liquid is passed through the gap between the front cylinder part 291a and the leg part 292b of the inner 292, and the lower part It can be discharged downward through the cutout opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower cutout 292c of the inner 292, and the lower cutout 295b of the handle cover 295 are the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on an extension line of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional body 40 in the inclination direction. Thus, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. It can be made to enter into the part 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (a driving device for the game ball B), the main frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending the wind into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, when the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened, the right cutout opening 295b can be hooked and pulled, and the door frame 3 and the like can be opened. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, in the handle 195, since the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is plated, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by putting a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b to grasp. It can be fixed and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant strength even if the hand is not continuously twisted. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the driving operation suitable for the player can be selected.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end thereof inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle area 180 is provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as an axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. The handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, so that the handle of the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 having a shape that has never been seen before can be seen in the existing portion, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's attention. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play with the pachinko machine 1 as well as the player who is traveling around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine with respect to the operation of the handle 195, and entertain the player by the operation of driving the game ball B with a new feeling. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195, when the production sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is generated by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air in the enclosure 624 vibrates due to the box 623, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 passes through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 to generate sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is generated by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47, and the cutout opening portion 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h of the base 291 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), and can be introduced into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the game state in the game area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the fingers of the player inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. , It is possible to surprise the player, to anticipate the arrival of a chance, to change the operation amount of the handle operation, to entertain the player, and to keep the player from getting bored , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening portion 295b and the opening portion 291h, the handle cover. The inside of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, so that the stress on the player can be relieved and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. it can.

Further, as described above, the handle 195 or the handle 195 is attached to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c into the handle cover unit 290. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is generated by the grill member 46. Since the plurality of blades 46b are used to guide and apply the stimulus, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibration device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.), bearing mechanism, etc., and it is possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 has the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portion 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has the appearance of a steering wheel of an automobile, and thus the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is significantly different from, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine is a pachinko machine that allows the player to play without hesitation. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Since the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part than the handle cover unit 290 is opened through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. Since it is visible, the tubular handle cover unit 290 can be given a feeling of openness, so that it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h penetrating therethrough are provided in a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened to the front, even if a liquid such as a drink or the game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, the handle cover unit 290 can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to prevent the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h from entering the port member 47 easily.

Further, the handle 195 has the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portion 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and a plurality of handle cover units 290 of the handle cover unit 290 having a front end having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be operated by gripping it with a hand like a handle of a conventional pachinko machine, or the spoke portion 195b can be operated by only a finger, or an outer ring. The steering wheel cover unit is operated by operating the portion 195c like a steering wheel of an automobile, operating by gripping the outer peripheral ring portion 195c with the notch opening 295b, and straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as pinching the inside and the outside of the 290 with a finger and performing a various game ball B driving operation (handle operation). Therefore, according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., the game ball B can be struck in the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and It is possible to enter the game ball B into the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Also, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 may be gripped by placing a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195b, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched with the fingers so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be performed by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the operation of the steering wheel and make the player less tired.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 has a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance in which the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, can be made to look good, and can attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from unnecessarily increasing, and the handle cover unit 290 is prevented. By suppressing that the game area 5a (door window 101a) is pressed upward, it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and it is possible to make the game area 5a relatively larger. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

Further, by appropriately emitting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (in the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emission decorations of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are conspicuous. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a handle that makes the door frame 3 look bad, and the door frame 3 can be made to look good.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 rotatably in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction and The guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g or the like can restrict the forward movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. 195c and the spokes 195b that connect the outer peripheral ring 195c and the central hub 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, the player can hit the game ball B by accepting the operation of the handle 195, so that only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided. Even if the handle 195 is operated while being touched, the game ball B can be driven in, and the pachinko machine 1 that can perform various driving operations (handle operation) as described above can be provided, and the player can It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in without touching the handle 195, prevent the handle operation using a tool from being performed, and reduce the load on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. Mounting base (not shown) attached to the front of the mounting base, a tray unit relay board (not shown) mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a sphere mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. A lending operation unit 220, a unit for removing upper bowl balls (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and a unit for removing upper bowl balls 240 mounted behind the unit for removing upper bowl balls, Equipped with.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 mounted on the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate left decoration unit 270 mounted on the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252 so as to be separated from each other left and right, And a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes, as an effect operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by the player to make a contact, and a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral substrate cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation unit base 315. And an intermediate relay board unit 330.

The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit unit 350, which is capable of projecting upward from the production operation unit cover unit 310 and provided with the production operation unit 301, and the production operation unit base 315. And a projection output adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projection output of the production operation unit unit 350 by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

The dish unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion that is approximately 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction from the left end to the right bulges to the front. The upper plate 201 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 73). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view goes under the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is located below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B toward the position. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball B. It is possible to remove static electricity charged in the inside.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame, which is horizontally cut at the lower dish supply port, and FIG. It is a sectional view showing an important part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate of the product of this embodiment and the conventional product. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating up and down and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c when assembled in the tray unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The released game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 is connected to the lower plate ball supply port 211j. On the other hand, a lower dish ball removal hole 202b of the lower dish 202 is provided in front of the central axis. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d has a cylindrical shape in which the lower dish ball supply port 211j extends straight forward so that the game ball B is straightly directed to the lower dish ball hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by the shortest distance movement.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265, Since the dish ball vent hole 202b and the lower dish ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower dish 202, the storage of the game balls B may be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower dish 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right side area in the lower plate 202 block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B come from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. Since the tank is not discharged, the tank detection sensor 154 operates and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room in the left side area in the lower tray 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower dish ball supply port 211c extends diagonally forward left. It is inclined to. More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the dish unit base 211 at a position directly behind the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left front so that the distance is maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis line (the line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end of the lower dish ball supply port 211c (ball discharge port 150d). Is moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball punching hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball punching hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower plate ball punching hole is moved. It is possible to reduce that the game balls B are concentrated and stored on the right side in the lower plate 202 in a state where 202a is closed. Then, in the lower plate 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the site of the lower plate ball hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. The side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends obliquely to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow between the rear plate 202 and the rear end of the lower plate 202, and thus the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball. The game ball B released from the post-drawing unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the side of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and discharged. It is possible to properly store the game balls B in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game balls B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit base 211. A main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner are provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper plate ball mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. A unit before removal (not shown) and a unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit before removal of the upper plate ball are provided.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion to the left of the left-right center when viewed from the front and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of the portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. And an upper plate ball feed port (not shown) whose upper part is located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a, which is assembled to the door frame 3, passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper plate. The ball is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball feeding guide passage 241b and the ball guide passage 241c of the post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper dish ball feed port 211a is located in front of a ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper dish ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the dish base unit 210. The game ball B inside is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Further, the dish unit base 211 of the present embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball hole 202a. The ball guiding unit 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper plate 201 by the ball removing guide path 241c to a position far from the lower plate ball removing hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (left part of the lower plate 202). is there. As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ball guiding portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a left inner wall that faces a right inner wall of the inner wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is formed in a cylindrical shape, in which the ball pulling guide passage 241c is opened. It is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the inner wall on the left side (ball guide portion 213), at least one game ball B is formed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower plate 202) at a position directly behind the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. A distance (gap) through which is distributed is formed. As a result, when the game ball B flowing from the upper plate 201 through the ball guiding part 241c comes into contact with the ball guiding part 213 from the right side, it is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guiding part 213, and the game is played. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 that is away from the lower plate ball removal hole 202a in the lower plate 202. That is, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest part (lower plate ball hole 202a) in the lower plate 202.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), since the lower dish ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as a conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, it is guided by the ball guide passage 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall on the left side of the lower dish ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while rolling back to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower dish ball hole 202b in the lower plate 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 in which the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, the storage of the game balls B (shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 50(b)) is concentrated in the region on the right side of the center in the lower plate 202, and When the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not discharged to the lower plate 202 side from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150, and thus the tank is full. Although the detection sensor 154 operates, there is a possibility that the lower plate 202 is determined to be full even though there is still room in the left side region in the lower plate 202.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the gaming ball B that has flowed through the ball guiding portion 241c is guided to the left side area in the lower plate 202. can do. Further, in the lower plate 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the site of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate balls are supplied. The foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) are passed through between the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the mouth 211c and the rear end of the lower plate 202. The game ball B released to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower plate 202, and the game ball B can be stored over the entire lower plate 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game balls B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

In order to support the above-described effects, the inventors of the present application store the products in the present embodiment and the conventional product in the respective lower trays 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 operates. The number of game balls B was counted. The counting of the game balls B was performed 10 times in each. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the number of stored game balls B is lower in the lower plate 202 (product of this embodiment) of this embodiment than in the conventional product at any time. It is significantly higher, and it was confirmed that it is possible to store about 40% more gaming balls B than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges to the front rather than the center of the left and right as viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that a portion of the upper plate near the right end of the upper plate body 212, which is closed at the upper end, sunk into the lower part of the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decoration board 273, the dish right decoration board 278, and the operation section relay board 332. It is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for subtracting and returning the amount of the game ball B rented out, such as cash and a prepaid card inserted in, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the light amount.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending button 224, which is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, The return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base portion 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has a character of “ball” on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily viewed from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or remaining money is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card loaded into the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the amount of cash or the amount of prepaid card that has been inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

The volume control button 227 controls the volume of sound for production such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a gourd shape of a double circle like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one circle (upper side) and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower side) circle, and between the two circles. A pattern that sounds like being emitted from a speaker is applied to the part. The volume adjustment button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. When the volume adjusting button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light quantity adjusting button 228 is formed in a bi-circular gourd shape like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a “+” character at the center of one circle (upper side) and a “−” character at the center of the other (lower side) circle, and the space between the two circles. A light bulb design is applied to the part. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the “+” side is pressed, and becomes dark when the “−” side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors from each other (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player does not make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted by using the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. At this time, the touch operation unit 302 is operated after selecting the item to be adjusted by displaying the setting menu for adjusting the volume, light amount, etc. on the effect display unit 1600 by appropriately operating the effect operation unit 301. Since the volume of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes time (time) to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted directly (directly), and it is troublesome to adjust the volume and the light amount. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper bowl]
The unit before removing the upper bowl and the unit after removing the upper bowl 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. After the upper bowl ball removal unit 240, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 in cooperation with the ball feeding unit 140. It is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 is attached to the rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl supply port from the rear, and is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removing slider 242, a spring (not shown) for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 is a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, as it projects upward from the site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and a ball. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the game ball B received in the receiving slot downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a rearward direction for guiding the game ball B on the rear surface of the rear base 241 lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b. The game ball B is guided downward from the position, and then the ball guide route 241c for guiding the game ball B to the right in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port, which is assembled to the plate base unit 210, opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. Is formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion and is moved rearward. And a projecting operation transmitting portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242 has the operation receiving portion penetrating the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protruding forward in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper tray removing ball is placed on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the upper bowl removing unit 240, the upper bowl removing slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper bowl removing slider 242 receives the upper tray ball through the operation receiving portion of the upper bowl removing slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upper moving end. Further, since the upper bowl ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c contacting the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. Therefore, the partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper bowl ball-removing button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball removing member 143 can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143 causes the ball removing member 143 to rotate so that the partition part 143a and the ball inlet 141a and the ball removing hole 143a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball removal port 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball removal guide path 241c, and then down from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, and the upper bowl ball removal button 222 ascends and abuts on the operation transmission portion 242b. The operating rod 143c that is rotating causes the ball removing member 143 to rotate, so that the partition portion 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b, and the original state is restored.

In this way, by the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower plate 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252 separately from each other in the left and right direction. The left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower dish main body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removing lid 265 of the lower dish ball removing unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the bottom plate body, when assembled in the plate unit 200, has a bottom surface located below the bottom plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a has a bottom plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right in the upper portion, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the lower portion. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that a player's finger can be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is provided between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and is provided with a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is mounted. .. The effect operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the dish unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball removal unit 260 includes a lower dish ball removal button 263 and a lower dish ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower dish ball removal button 263.

When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b of the dish unit body 252, and the lower dish ball removal lid is provided. 265 closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a opens the lower plate 202 inside. The game ball B can be discharged below the dish unit 200.

Note that when the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains moved, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a remains open. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pushed backward and then released, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is released. Returns to the position of the normal state and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the plate unit 200.

The plate left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a translucent plate left decoration that penetrates the plate left decoration 271. A lens 272 and a plate left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The plate left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decoration lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the dish left decoration body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decoration board 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end thereof is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decorating unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical dish right and left translucent dish right decorating body 276, and a translucent dish right decorating body 276 penetrating the dish right decorating body 276. A lens 277 and a plate right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the plate right decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging part 252a. The plate right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish right decoration body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decoration lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the dish right decoration body 276 in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish right decoration body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and the plate right decoration body 276 can be decorated by emitting light.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decoration unit 275 does not have ribs in the middle of the plate right decoration body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate right decoration board 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are partly projecting upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. It is possible to form a raised step between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 side. As a result, the player can use his/her step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a to hook his/her finger, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. In addition, the level difference between the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing out forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52A is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front with the production operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the production operation unit of FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the lower front side. is there. 55A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member is at the position of the upper moving end, and FIG. 55B is an effect operation from the state of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the production|operation production unit in the state which the partial unit moved to the raising position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in the state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member is at the position of the moving end downward.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player to make a contact operation, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player, and can accept the operation of the player or move the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to (vibrate), so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 of the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer shape, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outer side, and on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be mounted, and a plurality of LEDs 320a provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 for mounting the upper part of the operation operation unit cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312) with light emission decoration. Outer peripheral decoration board 320, outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to operation section base 315 so as to cover effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and operation section relay board unit attached to the rear surface of operation section base 315. 330 is provided.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the production operation unit unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for elevating the production operation unit unit 350, and the projection output of the production operation unit unit 350. And a thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 for The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment section of the plate unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation section base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has an annular shape having a hemispherical lower unit cover 311 that is opened upward and backward, and an insertion port 312a that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. And a unit upper cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the bottom of the operation portion base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed into a substantially spherical shape. By the way, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis line of the annular unit upper cover 312 is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The production operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

In the effect operation unit cover unit 310, at least the unit upper cover 312 has a light-transmitting property, and light emission decoration can be performed by light emission of a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 described later.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that projects far more forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation portion base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment section 212a of the upper dish body 212 of the dish base unit 210 on the rear side. The operation section base 315 is covered by the unit lower cover 311 at the front and the lower side, and is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation section 301 at the upper side. The operation portion base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation portion base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body 315a accommodates the effect operation unit unit 350 inside. In addition, a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of a central shaft 366 of a production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in a production operation unit unit 350 described later are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral substrate cover 325.

In the state where the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation part relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay substrate unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay substrate 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay substrate 332 from the rear side. And a substrate cover 333 attached to the substrate base 331.

The operation section relay board 332 is a performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outside decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor body 358, button inside decoration board 364, operation button. The connection between the elevation drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Stage operation unit]
The effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit unit 350 has a bottomed tubular button body 351 having an upper end side closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to an upper portion of the button body 351, and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and that is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down, and is arranged above the button base 354. And a ring-shaped button outside decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. And a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. And a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation portion cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to have a diameter of about ½ of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a constant width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and formed flat inside. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes of punching metal to suppress the electrostatic capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button intermediate decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 can be made excellent. It can be illuminated and decorated in various states.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connection connector in the contact detection sensor body 358. Accordingly, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) on the upper surface or the side surface of the button body 351. You can That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 includes a tubular sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and the length thereof is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and a central hole protruding from the inner surface toward the center. And a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough for the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The bottom of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of a pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outside decoration substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a double circumference of a concentric circle. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided on a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately causing the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 to emit light, it is possible to cause the site on the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 to emit light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided on a straight line portion that passes through the pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the performance operation unit 301. Further, the vibration of the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although not shown in detail, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to the sensor IC including a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the electrostatic capacitance of the sensor electrode included therein. Further, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. That is, the contact detection sensor body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the electrostatic capacity with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined electrostatic capacity set by the external resistance is exceeded. In this embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but a plurality of stages of signals may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the effect operation unit unit 350 of the present embodiment, a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting electrostatic capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body with the effect operation unit unit 350 protruding upwards. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) on the side surface of 351. From this, the effect operation unit unit 350 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. In the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like a sphere. When the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state of protruding above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downwards against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, it is possible to function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), even if it is pressed, it does not move further downward, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 to a state higher than the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. When the upper surface of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 is touched when operating the contact operation unit 302. In this case, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having the unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button main body 351, by forming fine irregularities, a plurality of streaks or the like on the surface (upper surface) of the button main body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the touch operation unit 302. Thus, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining.

Although the button body 351 is transparent in the above description, the invention is not limited to this. The button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent such that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that it has a light-transmitting property. Thereby, the button main body 351 can be made to emit light by the light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355, the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364, etc. provided below, and the player can be made to emit light by the button body 351. Can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Stage operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section raising/lowering mechanism 360 is attached to the operation section base 315, and is capable of moving up and down the effect operation section unit 350. The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 is mounted below the effect operation section unit 350 in the main body section 315a of the operation section base 315, and includes an elevating mechanism base 361 having a substantially circular outer periphery and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of columnar cylinders, which are arranged symmetrically and whose lower end is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and whose upper end penetrates the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354 and extends upward. A guide shaft 362 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are connected at their upper ends to each other, and a disk-shaped upper base 363 whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353 is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 to guide light upward. And a button inner decoration board 364 on which a plurality of illuminatable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of elevating springs 365, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted, urge the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. And a central shaft 366 having a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is mounted on the lower surface of the lifting mechanism base 361 such that the operation shaft elevating drive motor 367 is installed so that the rotation shaft projects upward, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is installed on the rotation shaft. And a spur gear-shaped driven gear 368 that is engaged with the lift drive gear 368 and is rotatably mounted on the upper side of the lift mechanism base 361. And a lift cam drive gear member 370 that is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end, is rotatably attached through the central shaft 366, and elevates the button base 354 by rotating. A member 371, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361, and the pressing detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 that detects the elevation of the performance operation unit unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and an elevation spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361. The projection output detection sensor 375 that detects the projection output of the effect operation unit unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a and an elevating spring. And a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button lift drive motor 367, a lift detection sensor 374, and a protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the lifting mechanism base 361, the lower ends of the legs 361b are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a from the center to the front and the rear.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrates through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. Lower ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and upper ends thereof are attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 may form a space for accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower protrusion into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372. it can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can cause the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to emit light by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the guide shaft 362 is inserted in each of them. The lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 are in contact with the lower elevating spring holding members 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper ends are in contact with the button base 354.

The lift cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a, and is connected to the lower end of the lift cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downwardly from and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 374. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The lifting cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, and the elevating spring 365 urges the button base 354 upward (effect operation unit unit 350). Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper projecting portion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower projecting portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space for accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protruding portion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The press detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowest position (normal state). The pressing detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state when the effect operation unit raising/lowering mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 upward from a normal state, because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the push detection sensor 373 causes the button base 354 to move. The detection operation piece 354d can be detected to detect the press operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation section 303).

The up-and-down detection sensor 374 detects the up-and-down detection piece 370c of the up-and-down cam drive gear member 370, so that the up-and-down cam member 371 is connected via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the up-and-down cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is being detected.

The protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating/lower spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380.

The effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by the pair of front and rear guide shafts 362, and the pair of elevating springs 365 can move the button base 354 up and down. The effect operation unit unit 350 can be urged upward via the above. In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to move the effect operation section unit 350 (effect operation section 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation section cover unit 310. Can be made. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can cause the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by causing the plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the in-button decoration board 364 to emit light as appropriate.

In the normal state, the effect operation section lifting/lowering mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, effect operation is performed. The sub-unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 coincide with each other, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310. And the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the raising/lowering drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 in a normal state (the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowered position), it meshes with the raising/lowering drive gear 368. The elevation cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the engaging portion. While rolling from 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c of the first cam 371b, the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various vertical positions by the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381, which will be described in detail later. it can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit unit 350 is lifted with a protrusion output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. Can be projected into position.

In the state in which the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 causes the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. When the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in this raised position, the effect operation unit unit 350 causes the elevating spring 365 to move. The button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 by moving downward against the urging force of. When the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 causes the up-and-down cam member 371 to rotate counterclockwise in plan view, as shown in FIG. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

In addition, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is returned to the lowered position, the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the lower elevating spring holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. (See FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also exerted. It becomes weak and the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button lift drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button lifting drive motor 367, an inexpensive one with low torque can be used.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 is stopped and the guide pin 354c moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the effect operation unit unit 350 is returned to the original lowered position.

In the above description, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d so that the button base 354 (button body 351) suddenly protrudes from the lowered position to the raised position. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is moved to the lowered position by being locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 causes the lifting cam member 371 to be viewed in plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the ascending/descending distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the guide pin 354c to move to the third cam 371e. Will move upwards along. Then, when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load on the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, the protrusion amount of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, and therefore according to the game state (for example, the first starting opening 2004 or By varying the protrusion amount of the button body 351 according to the lottery result of the special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second starting opening 2005), it is possible to make the player suggest the expectation for the game. it can.

It should be noted that at least one shallow recess that can engage the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same projection amount, and the variation in the projection amount can be prevented. Further, in the case where a recess is provided in at least one position in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess so that the operation button lift drive motor 367 stops the lift cam member 371 from rotating. It is not necessary to continue, and the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. The projection output adjustment mechanism 380 changes the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 that biases the effect operation unit unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) projects upward ( It is possible to change the sudden output). The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 that extends downwardly in a cylindrical shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery thereof and that has a central shaft 366 inserted therein and is rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw. And a lower elevating spring holding member 385 with which the lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 abut and which are in mesh with the screw portion 384b of the 384 and through which the pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate.

The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the protruding force adjusting drive motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding in a gap between the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed such that the top and bottom thereof extend from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower elevating spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b vertically penetrating at the center of the main body portion 385a and screwed into the screw portion 384b, and the front and rear portions of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The elevating and lower unsprung holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 to move the lower elevating spring holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is reduced (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward. Thus, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. Accordingly, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit unit 350 to the upper side.

The detection piece 385d of the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is most raised. That is, when the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is maximized, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the up-and-down spring holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, the up-and-down spring holding member by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 is detected. By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent further compression of the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to prevent damage to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380.

Further, since the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection output of the effect operation unit unit 350 as described above, the button main body is operated by the contact detection body 352 while the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowered position. Detecting contact or approach of a detection target (for example, a player's finger or the like) to 351 causes the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to project the production operation unit unit 350 and bring it into contact with the detection target. At some time, the vertical position of the lower elevating spring holding member 385 may be appropriately selected so that the protrusion output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 projects upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game. Therefore, according to the rush output adjusting mechanism 380, depending on the gaming state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005). By increasing or decreasing the thrust output of the button body 351, the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) to project the effect operation unit unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is different from the original use. Since various stresses act on the compression coil spring, there is a risk that the internal tissue will be deteriorated early and damaged. On the other hand, in the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the projection output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the up and down spring 365 by moving the up and down spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce early deterioration of the elevating spring 365. It is possible to stably project over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. 58A is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with an effect operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of a player's hand, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation part 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation part 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state where the pressing operation section 303 (effect operation section unit 350) capable of protruding upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. This makes it easier for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the rendering operation unit 301.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 is effected. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the effect operation unit 300, an effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decoration substrate 355 is arranged inside the outer periphery of the pressing operation portion 303, and a button middle decoration substrate 364 is further arranged inside thereof. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outwardly in the order of the button outside decoration board 355 and the effect operation portion outer circumference decoration board 320 with the button middle decoration board 364 as the center. The LED 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 is arranged below the contact detection body 352. However, since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it is transparent. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (on the player side).

In the effect operation unit 300, the annular unit upper cover 312 can be illuminated and decorated by the LED 320a of the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. In addition, the LED 355a of the outside-button decoration substrate 355 allows the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface to be illuminated and decorated. Further, the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364 can make the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 emit light.

The plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the middle button decoration board 364 are arranged in a row on the circumference, and therefore, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are concentrically arranged, a light emission effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 is emitted. It is possible to show the luminescent effect that converges to the player.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 58( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is in a descending position where the upper surface of the operation unit 300 is aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is effect displayed. It is displayed on the device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output. When the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button main body 351, the process moves to the next stage of presentation. It should be noted that when a contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 or the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operation feeling. At this time, the expectation degree for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, such as a “big hit” game) is determined by the emission color of the button body 351, the emission brightness, the emission pattern, and the like. You may make it suggest.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation unit 302, and it is possible for the player to strongly recognize that the touch operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the player to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (of the hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) up and down. The urging force of the spring 365 causes it to project upward (pop up). More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift cam member 371 counterclockwise in a plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 causes the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the effect operation unit unit 350 (the button body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 vigorously project upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above and above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 projects upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly amaze the player, and It can attract a lot of interest.

Then, the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, so that the player can enjoy the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is opened. When the button body 351 is moved downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed triggered by the pressing operation to entertain the player by the player participation type effect.

At the time of the above-mentioned effect, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 strengthens or weakens the projection output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to project, so that the expectation for the game can be increased depending on the strength of the projection output. May be suggested. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed.

In the effect of causing the effect operation unit unit 350 to project, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like has approached the moving range (the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is pressed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, since the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's finger or the like and is given a shock, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may increase or decrease the protrusion output of the button body 351 so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game depending on the intensity of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352 causes the player's finger or the like to be within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351 outside the protruding range of the button body 351 protruding upward. The button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body 351 has approached. Thereby, since the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion force of the button body 351 stronger or weaker so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the wind pressure on the player's fingers or the like. You may do it.

Furthermore, as the effect of projecting the effect operation unit unit 350, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is caused to project by the projecting force adjusting mechanism 380 with a strong projecting force, the button body 351 vigorously projects and a sound (projecting sound) is generated, so the player is surprised by the projecting sound. You can Also, when the button body 351 is caused to project with a weak projecting force by the projecting power adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the projecting of the button body 351. The player can be surprised by the fact that the button main body 351 projects before it is noticed.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is weakened by the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is generally You may make it perform the effect which makes it push operation similar to a push button. Alternatively, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 may be increased by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the player may be caused to perform an effect of pressing the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after projecting the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), an effect may be executed in which a contact operation is performed on the protruding button body 351. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has the downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly, the side surface of the button body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable that the urging force of the elevating spring 365 be strengthened by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation The contact operation of the portion 302) can be facilitated.

In the above description, as the effect of projecting the effect operation unit unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction to cause the button base 354 to rotate. Although the guide pin 354c of No. 1 is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the lift cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is moved up and down. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view by the drive motor 367, and the elevating cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. Alternatively, the button body 351 may be stopped from projecting upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lower elevating spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

As described above, even when the button main body 351 is made to project partway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button main body 351 can be pressed and the button main body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Thus, the player participation type production can be enjoyed by the player. In this case, since the protrusion amount can be changed upward of the button body 351 depending on the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the protrusion amount of the button body 351. Can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), after the operation unit unit 350 is projected, the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertaining. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbols that have been randomly selected. The biasing force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can press the effect operation unit unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that it is possible to entertain the player due to the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit unit 350, and more versatile. The effect can be presented, and the player can be prevented from getting tired.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection object can be detected at a plurality of contact steps (approaching steps) with respect to the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351). It is also possible to provide thresholds in a plurality of stages according to the capacitance of 352 and change the effect according to each stage. That is, as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases, and a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the electrostatic capacitance. It is also possible to detect in multiple stages by providing the above, and to utilize for the production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers and the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers and the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within the predetermined distance from the button body 351, and the game is played. The player's finger or the like is in contact with the button main body 351, and the effect is changed according to each step, so that even one contact detection sensor main body 358 presents various effects to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In the above embodiment, as the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member. Although the state in which 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56(a), the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved. It may be moved downward. As a result, in the normal state, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the elevating spring 365. Further, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower elevating spring holding member 385 by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 that is strongly compressed.

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for player participation type effects of various patterns, it is possible to entertain a variety of effects to the player and make the player tired. It can be made difficult and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (integrated two arcs) effect operation part outer periphery decorative substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and the effect operation part outer periphery is provided. A contact detection sensor body 358 is provided in the effect operation unit unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance, when the performance operation unit unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode). ) Approaches the performance operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button middle decoration substrate 364, and the electrostatic capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the proximity of the performance operation unit outer circumference decoration substrate 320 or the button middle decoration substrate 364, and the contact detection sensor The main body 358 may make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 and between the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. Accordingly, by moving the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button decoration substrate 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358. And the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button inside decoration substrate 364 by a shield connected to the ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change. It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in electrostatic capacitance due to the approach of the in-button decoration substrate 364, and prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another Embodiment of Dish Unit]
Subsequently, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60B is a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the switching part between and typically, (c) is a plate|board left decoration unit of a plate unit, a plate right decoration unit, and a production operation unit etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and rear side of an operation unit etc. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a contact detection body having a decorative property, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into the left and right sides of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his/her fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detection body right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. Becomes When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the electrostatic capacitances of both the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R change, whereby the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body. Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L returns to the original value, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the electrostatic charge of the contact detection body right 390R. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains detected.

As described above, the movement of the player's finger or the like is caused by the combination of the detection/non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and the change thereof. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a touch operation with more various movements, and to present the player with a player participation type effect that allows the touch operation unit 302 to perform various touch operations. The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. It should be noted that if a contact detector is added, it becomes possible to detect a more complicated motion.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392. According to this embodiment, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like by any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state where the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are respectively provided at different positions. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 in a distributed manner inside (bottom side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, The contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

Further, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be a part of the pachinko machine 1 that is not desired to be touched by the player (for example, a part where the player may be injured, or another player may be annoyed). It may be provided in a certain portion, a portion where fraudulent acts may be performed, etc.), and when any one of the contact detection bodies 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or a warning may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b), between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, switching is performed to connect only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392. This is an example in which the section 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only at a desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. As the switching unit 394, "switching by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "switching by another electronic circuit", "movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60C) The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement thereof" and the like.

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type effect in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order is executed. At this time, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection body 393 can detect whether or not a finger or the like of the player has touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a player-participation-type effect having a high game property by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first operation is performed on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, When the switching unit 394 connects the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392, and when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted, the switching unit 394 connects the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392. You may make it switch so that it may be done.

Thereby, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To As a result, it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and avoid causing the player to feel uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and in the state where the player's finger or the like is inserted into the gap, the effect is produced. When the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 that has been moved to the front is moved to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detection body 393b to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped and the finger or the like is separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. Is notified to the player, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward only when the second contact detection body 393b is in the non-detection state to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 for detecting the contact of a player's finger or the like is made star-shaped to have a decorative property (design property). The shape of the contact detection body 395 having the decorative property is not limited to the star shape, and a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a predetermined item is imitated. The shape, the shape imitating a predetermined logo, the shape of a frame, or the like may be used. As a result, since the contact detection body 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detection body 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed by punching metal, but the present invention is not limited to this. The contact detection body may be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same operational effect as described above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back surface side of the transparent front surface member so as not to be directly touched by a player's finger or the like, and it is possible to avoid wear of the contact detection body and to provide a tactile sensation by the surface member. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which the button inner decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352 is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), The contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and the decoration body 398 may be provided below the contact detection body 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61( b ), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visible. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397. good.

Further, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrated with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of the finger or the like with the player or perform the contact operation. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like comes into contact with or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the presence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62A is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 62C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG. The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 that is attached to the left outside of the door window 101a in the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. And a door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a vertically arranged at a predetermined interval are mounted on the front surface and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. So as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed up and down at a certain interval are mounted on the front surface and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421; a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423; The door frame left side decorative body 426 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front sides of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guiding member 427 that guides light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 to the front, and upper and lower parts of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. From the left side middle light guiding member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction to the front, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the up-down direction of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. And a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light in the forward direction.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two kinds of resins, that is, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. The LED 422b is mounted. In addition, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decoration substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, that is, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the decoration substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of emitting light in a range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are in three sets of two above, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups in full color. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

On the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, although not shown, two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. The wiring cable consisting of the electric wire of is connected. Then, when the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and the right side thereof is formed in an uneven shape. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. The LED 423b is mounted. In addition, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423.

In this door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, including six first LEDs 423a and twelve second LEDs 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b provided on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of emitting light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, each of which is two in sequence from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. No. 3 and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups in full color. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

On the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, although not shown, two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. The wiring cable consisting of the electric wire of is connected. Then, when the LED driver 423c of the lower left side decorative board 423c of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending forward and backward is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end of the through hole 424a is in contact with the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 which penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and projects forward, the second side of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is applied to the light guide shaft portion 427a with an equal amount of light from both upper and lower sides, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

In the left upper reflector 424, a mounting hole for mounting the door frame left side base 421 is provided in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 is formed with a through hole 425a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame lower left side decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending forward and backward is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 is inserted with a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. Accordingly, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 which penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 that faces the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a or the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

In the left side lower reflector 425, an attachment hole for attaching to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating forward and backward along the center of the width in the horizontal direction in the vertical direction at regular intervals. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding barrel 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 and the holding barrel 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided. The respective tips of are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 further has a decoration portion 426b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 includes four light guide shaft portions 427a that extend in the front-back direction in a column shape, and a runner portion 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the upper left side reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426, and the front end surface is the door frame left side. The surface of the side decoration body 426 is in a state of being in agreement with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side center light guide member 428 includes three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding tubes 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface thereof is the door frame left side. The surface of the side decorative body 426 is in conformity with the surface of the side decorative body 426. The left side center light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and irradiate the light outward from the tip end, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface thereof is the door frame left side. The surface of the side decoration body 426 is in a state of being in agreement with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction slightly protrudes forward from a portion below and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end below the door window 101a, and a plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. Is located above the speaker opening 211b. The upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are located at a position rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to some extent. Is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is radiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 in a state where the light is sufficiently spread. The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly illuminated.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 provided at a position rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light), so that the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light in a dot shape brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guiding member 427, the left side middle light guiding member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided at the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides in a uniform light amount. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadow becomes difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly arranged. It is possible to decorate the surface with light emission.

Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 is provided with a decoration portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on the door frame left side decoration body 426. The shadow of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a is difficult to understand because the decoration 426b is provided in the portion where the shadow is projected. The appearance of the side decoration body 426 in the light emission decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from back. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 which is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a in the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. And a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a that are vertically arranged at a certain interval are mounted on the front surface, and are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. And a door frame lower right side decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed up and down on the front surface at regular intervals are mounted, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. And a side decoration body 435.

The door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guiding member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 first. The right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from one LED 433a to the front side.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the left side surface decoration body 438, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. A light-transmitting right-side left lens 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439 having a predetermined shape and penetrating left and right so as to cover the right side surface of the door frame right-side base 431. The door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 having the decoration hole 440a, and the door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 are provided, and the door frame right side right surface The light-transmitting right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side bends rearward when the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the vertical center. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically in the vicinity of the lower portion and extends vertically to the lower end.

The door frame right side base 431 includes a decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and a decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 (the decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). A plurality of reflector portions 431a, which are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end, are provided at the height of the decorative portion 441a. The rear end sides of the reflectors 431a, which are the insides of the decorative portions 439a and 441a, are inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surfaces are curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a decoration hole 438a and a decoration hole 440a provided in the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 at the rear side with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to the (decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decoration portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding the decoration portion 439a and the portion inside the decoration portion 441a. , It penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right sides and is connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 is provided with left and right light emitted rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. By reflecting in a direction, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are illuminated and decorated (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. The LED 432b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame upper right side decorative substrate 432 at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted. Further, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are in three sets of two above, three from the third to the fifth, and three from the sixth to the eighth. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

Since the first LED 432a is divided into two sets, the second LED 432b is divided into three sets, and the third LED 432c is divided into two sets, each of the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, Since the third LED 432c and the third LED 432c are caused to emit light in full color respectively, there are a total of 21 systems including 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 described later A total of 24 systems of 3 systems for one group above the third LED 433c divided into 2 groups are controlled.

Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable composed of four electric wires is connected to one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 432a divided into three sets, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 with 2 The two third LEDs 433c of the upper group of the grouped groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. The LED 433b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433 at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433.

On this door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs including six first LEDs 433a, twelve second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a having the second LEDs 433b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between the second LEDs 433b). Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, each of which is one by one from the top. Also, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. No. 3 and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, respectively. Therefore, each of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, Since the third LED 433c and the third LED 433c are each caused to emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems, three systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two sets of the third LEDs 433c. Among them, the upper one set of three systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decorative board 433. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is provided with two power supplies for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable composed of four electric wires is connected to one clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received in accordance with the command. Each of the six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower set of the two sets It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with a through hole 434a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. At the same time, a tubular holding tube 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 or the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The periphery of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that pass through the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing the through holes 434a on the upper and lower sides thereof, and the like. Light from the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is applied to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a or the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the 435.

In the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attaching to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration 435 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame right side decoration 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating forward and backward along the center of the width in the horizontal direction in the vertical direction at regular intervals. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The door frame right side decoration body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration body 426. Further, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further has a decoration portion 435b having a constant arcuate recessed shape and extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. doing.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a that extend in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and runner portions 436b that connect the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , Made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided from above the right side reflector 434 at a fixed interval in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. The surface of the decorative body 435 coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. The right side upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light outward from the tip end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided from below the right side reflector 434 at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends in the front-rear direction with substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the front end surface thereof is the door frame right side. The surface of the decorative body 435 coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This right side lower light guide member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

The door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in a vertically extending plate shape and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The front end side of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in two colors by synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 is formed in two colors by two kinds of resins of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, so that a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and protrudes leftward to decorate the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a matches the outer surface (left side) of the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. The decoration part 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 has a radial pattern in which two colors are formed in the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. It looks like the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). Further, the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a key hole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. The vertical direction of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is formed to be substantially the same as the entire height of the door frame 3. The front end side of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b.

The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed in two colors by synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 includes an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. The two-color resin is molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, and projects rightward to protrude to the right of the door frame. There is a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a coincides with the outer surface (right side) of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 when fitted in the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The decoration part 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decoration portion 441a facing the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 has a radial pattern formed in two colors in the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. It looks like the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a that is light-emitted and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side. The side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The color of the part is formed to be the same as the color of the part on the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction protrudes far more forward than a portion of the opposite door frame left side unit 420 at the same height. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It appears to be embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 largely projects forward from the top to a portion at a height of about a half portion, forming a partition. Thereby, in the island facility of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a partition shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, making it difficult for another player to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel like being seen by another player, the other player can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a position somewhat rearward of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is radiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 in a state where the light is sufficiently spread. The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly illuminated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board provided at a position rearward from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (guided) to the front by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a dot shape brighter than the other parts.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 causes the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 to emit light, thereby reflecting the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. Through the 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left surface decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right surface decorative body 440 are fitted. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 that is present can be decorated with light emission. In addition, part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 can be light-emitted and decorated, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be conspicuous and has a high appealing power to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front surface side of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to decorate the front end side door frame right side decoration body 435 with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decoration substrate 433, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Since the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are present, light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b causes the rear door. The frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 are illuminated to perform light emission decoration, or light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the front door frame right side decoration body 435. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitting decoration. Accordingly, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent to perform light emission decoration. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting the player with a luminous effect with a higher effect.

The door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. And the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. Accordingly, since the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides in an equal amount of light, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is provided. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are hard to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured such that the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other. .. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion to be formed, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be difficult to see, and the appearance of the light decoration of the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that is connected to the lower end of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decoration 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the top of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with a length that is substantially the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 has a semi-arcuate shape that protrudes forward in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 extends in the left-right direction in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the door frame top decoration 453 has a front surface formed in a semi-circular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame top central decoration board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top left decoration substrate 456, the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 can be light-embellished by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters, and output the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, the door frame top right decoration board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker, and the door frame sub unit of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are sunk from the front to a position behind the inside of the upper portions of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers and the pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71, and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the two-color molded outer layer is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. 71(b) is the outer layer with the inner layer left unchanged in (a). FIG. 6B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the state of FIG. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button body 351 of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decoration 271, the dish right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a half-tube shape. Since the door window 101a is formed, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the unit upper cover 312, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the plate left decorative substrate 273, the plate right decorative substrate 278, the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By making the LED of the device properly emit light, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, or the player can be made to see the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper dish 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the left-right direction. Accordingly, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical performance operation unit 300 is located in the center, it is possible to enhance the impact of appearance, and the performance operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 or press operation of the performance operation unit 300 can be enhanced. It is possible to make the operation unit 303) stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous with each other, thereby forming one sphere, and thus the player. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated, and the effect operation unit 300 formed of a huge sphere allows the player to look at other things at a glance. This pachinko machine can be recognized as a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can enhance the appealing power to the player. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302). The upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the dish unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301 can easily see the entire effect operation unit 301, and You can look big. Further, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to operate the giant spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to increase the expectation for execution of the player participation type operation which operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player can actively operate the effect operation unit 301, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 makes the player participation type effect entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns provided on the outer surface are colored in two colors by using two kinds of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The exterior portion of the door frame 3 on which the pattern is applied is two-color molded with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, when the door frame right side unit 430 is described as an example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), if the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-like pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the inner portion of the circular pattern is inside. The honeycomb-shaped pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the parts other than the pattern, and the outer appearance is an appearance in which a circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and a relatively circular or The radial pattern becomes hard to see. That is, the outer appearance is such that the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In addition, in FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration portion 441a fitted in the decoration hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members forming the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (composite) By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, etc., the appearance can be greatly changed even if the shape is unchanged.

Therefore, for example, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen at the time of a minor change, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b may be changed for each manufacturing lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots may be shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island facility to give a colorful feeling to the player. It is possible to increase the appealing power for.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 of the two-color molding is shown. The frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molded) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and the two-color molding is used to form a polka dot pattern decoration. Since the decoration is formed into a desired shape at the same time as the decoration is applied to the decoration, the decoration has a desired shape like a decoration of a conventional pachinko machine. Since it is not necessary to apply a desired decoration by coating or the like after forming it, it is possible to save the labor for the decoration and suppress the increase in cost.

Further, since the decoration of the decoration is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decoration can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, in the case of forming a polka dot pattern decoration by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot pattern circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are light-transmitted respectively. When they are formed in the same color with different ratios, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the circle with a polka dot pattern is hard to see, and the appearance is as if the polka dot pattern was not decorated. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b The polka dot circles are now clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background with white polka dot decorations. As described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. If you change the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot and ship different pachinko machines 1 of different lots to the same game hall and install them in a line at the island facility, the island facility will feel colorful Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal that can give a strong impact to the player who is traveling around in the game hall and can attract the player.

Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having a decoration formed by two-color molding with a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances is provided on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a facing the front, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side surface surface decoration body 440 and the like are provided, and thus the decoration body is used to decorate the outside of the door window 101a to improve the appearance. You can

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a may be difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. This makes it possible to relatively clearly see the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a, and to make the decoration clearly visible.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b transmits light. The inner layer 3a should not be seen through from the outside as a low rate, and a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through when the model is changed. As a result, it is possible to greatly change the view of the decoration of the ornament, and it is possible to easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the ornament.

Further, as described above, the inner layer 3a can be made invisible by the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b and is transparent to the outer layer 3b when the model is changed. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a different synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the ornamental body can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the ornamental body. , It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for the model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board which can emit light. 433 of the third LED 433c, and since the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than others, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 The portion of the layer 3a (polka dot portion) can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be illuminated and illuminated to improve the appearance and the player to the right of the door frame. The light-emitting decoration of the side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

Also, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c with which the outer layer 3b is irradiated through the inner layer 3a can also cause the outer layer 3b to emit light. The side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 can be light-emitted and decorated, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 can be displayed neatly and played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the interest of the person can be provided.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor molding of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances). Since it is formed by molding, the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are caused to emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface, the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used, and the like. The decoration that is visible when there is no light and the decoration that is visible when the LED is emitting light can be different, and the decoration can be changed to strongly attract the player's interest. More specifically, for example, two-color molding will be described as an example of multi-color molding. When a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence state, only the exposed portion of the inner layer 3a on the surface is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly radiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the holes are formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is not covered with The hole shape of the layer 3a becomes visible, and the exposed portion of the surface and the hole portion of the inner layer 3a can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is light-emitted. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are decorated with light emission. The parts to be illuminated can be made different, and the decoration to be illuminated can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. Further, by causing the LED to emit light in accordance with the game state, the change in the decoration of the ornament allows the player to have a chance or change the driving operation (for example, “right hit”). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to suggest and which can produce various effects.

Further, since the front and rear projection amounts of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) are made different, Since it is possible to have different impressions (visual appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the left front side and the right front side, the pachinko machine 1 is moving around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes the front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous migration, and the player is interested in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 can be attached to the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal and can attract a player who is traveling in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. ..

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in a front view for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotation operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b with the central hub portion 195a extending outward, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the respective spoke portions 195b, And has an appearance similar to the steering wheel of a car.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with a front handle lens 185, and between the front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, there is provided a handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface.

The handle decoration board 184 is one at the center, three are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six are provided at constant intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10 The LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. 72, and two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, which are respectively connected by the broken lines. , And two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LED 184a divided into these 5 groups is controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and the LED 184a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 72, these twelve LEDs 293a are connected to each other at the lower left of the center, the left two, the upper left two, the upper right two, and the right two. It is divided into 6 sets, 2 in the lower right. The LED 293a divided into these 6 groups is controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and the LED 293a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293 are provided on the handle 195, a light-emission effect in which light rotates about the handle 195 and a direction toward the center of the handle 195. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light is spread toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293 allows the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 to be illuminated and decorated.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 420 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame right side unit 430 of the plate unit 200. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decoration body 435 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decoration 271, the dish right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a half-tube shape. Since the door window 101a is formed, the player can see a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided toward the front.

More specifically, the plate left decoration board 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and LEDs 273a of the plate right decoration board 278 to be described later to emit light. (Not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

The plate right decoration board 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two groups, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled by 6 systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative substrate 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

On the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are mounted side by side between the first LEDs 422a. Eight second LEDs 422b and a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are provided to emit light, and an LED driver 422c is provided. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected to one another by a dashed-dotted line, two from the top, three from the third to the fifth, and from the sixth to the eighth. It is divided into three sets, up to the first three. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 422a and the second LEDs 422b The LED 422b can emit light in an appropriate full color.

On the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are mounted side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It is provided with 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, each of which is a set of two in order from the top, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as shown by the chain line in FIG. Are divided into four sets, that is, three from the seventh to ninth, and three from the tenth to twelfth from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED 423a of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in an appropriate full color.

On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. Eight second LEDs 432b that are mounted and four third LEDs 432c that are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction are provided. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The LED driver 432d of FIG. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected to each other by a chain line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided into three sets, up to the first three. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third divided into two sets in the door frame lower right side decorative board 433. One set of the third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set have an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 has six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a vertically arranged between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. LED driver 433d for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, one by one in order from the top two, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as shown by the chain line in FIG. Are divided into four sets, that is, three from the top to the ninth and three from the top to the twelfth. Furthermore, the four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. Six first LEDs 433a divided into three sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and one lower two third LEDs 433c divided into two sets The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The board 432 and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are also different from each other in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the front surface of each of them. The number of the one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b and the number of the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). The system connected by the chain line and the chain double-dashed line) is provided symmetrically. Accordingly, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LED for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top central decoration board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, an LED 455a, an LED 456a of the door frame top left decoration board 456, and an LED 457a of the door frame top right decoration board 457. And an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two LEDs from the left as shown by the broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a which are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

The door frame top right decoration board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a which are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, And light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the left side lower guide member. The light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 allow the opening portion of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, the player can be made to see the luminous effect of brightly emitting dots in a bright manner on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The player can be made to be “hatched” by the light emission effect of shining a spot light.

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative substrate 273, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative substrate 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Second LED 423b of decoration board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decoration board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decoration board 433, LED 455a of door frame top central decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are appropriately made to emit light so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and the light is emitted so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown or shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 72 executes a light emission effect of spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar shape (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. You can

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and from there the front side. Since the irradiation is performed on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, compared to the general surface of the opening portion 426a and the opening portion 435a, it is possible to emit bright spot light with high brightness. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426. And even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a, and the game is performed through the door window 101a. It is possible to visually recognize the game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a in a good state.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are projected forward of the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening portion 426a and the opening portion 435a are connected to the front ridge portion that is the front end of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 that project forward (the front end projecting forward in an arc shape in plan view is connected Since it is provided on the vertical line), the spot emission light is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the light of the spot emission in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the spots behind the door window 101a are reflected. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness can direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the spot-light-emitting portion is provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 that project forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-light-emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitted portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitted light. Thus, when the spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the high-luminance spot emission light can be seen by other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be selected for selection. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of attracting a player who is traveling around to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, on both sides sandwiching a spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot-lighting the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pin (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guides the light of the spot LED. Since the surface LEDs are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is provided. The effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is divided into two, a front decoration substrate 321 and a rear decoration substrate 322.

Eighteen LEDs 320a of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration substrate 321 of the effect operation unit outer periphery decoration substrate 320. The eighteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided with six at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three at intervals on the middle circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. It is provided, and the remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration substrate 322 of the effect operation unit outer periphery decoration substrate 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322, 4 LEDs are provided on the circumference of the circle close to the inner circumference, and 2 LEDs are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc. They are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six pieces are provided at intervals of three at both ends of the arc on the circumference close to the outer circumference.

The eighteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are three sets of six on the inner circumference, two of which are two in the circumferential direction, and three on the middle circumference, as connected by a chain line in FIG. Is divided into three groups of one each, and nine groups on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction, for a total of nine groups. In addition, the eighteen LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322 are connected in a two-dot chain line in FIG. 73, four on the inner circumference are two in pairs near the ends, and two on the middle circumference. Three sets are provided, one for each set of three, and nine sets on the outer circumference are divided into two sets, three sets near each end, for a total of seven sets. That is, on the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 groups are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and the LEDs 320a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

According to the effect operation part outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, by appropriately emitting 31 pieces and 48 systems of LEDs 320a, the effect operation part 301 emits light such that the light rotates or the light is concentrated in the center. It is possible to show the player the effect and the luminous effect that the light spreads to the outside.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a outside one of the left and right sides of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a so as to have different protrusion amounts in the front-rear direction. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted A board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a second LED 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and a second LED 433b are mounted; Is provided and guides light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 or the door frame right side decoration body 435 and moves forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side The door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are formed by making the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 emit light. Light emission decoration (surface emission) can be performed in a planar shape, and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, they are radiated forward from their front ends (front end surfaces). Guide in the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 A portion corresponding to the tip of the optical axis part 427a, the light guide axis part 428a, the light guide axis part 429a, the light guide axis part 436a, and the light guide axis part 437a can be made to emit light in a dot shape (spot light emission). ..

Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 first LED422a and second LED422b, the first LED423a The door frame left side decoration provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately emitting the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b. 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are made to light-emit the whole surface, or the door frame left side decoration body 426 and a part of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are made to emit the dot light emission, and the door frame left Since the side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be light-emitting decorated in a planar shape while part of them are light-emitting decorated, a variety of light-emitting effects can be shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and entertain the player, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the second LEDs 422b, the first LEDs 423a, and the second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 are separated, and the door frame right side The side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are symmetric with respect to each other and the system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LEDs 432b, the first LEDs 433a, and the second LEDs 433b are separated from each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the first LEDs 423a, the first LEDs 432a, and the first LEDs 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b are systems different from each other, the door frame left side Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the side of the decorative body 426, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the side of the door frame right side decorative body 435. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decoration body 426 side is diverted to the data for the door frame right side decoration body 435 side, or the door frame left side decoration body 426 side and the door frame Since the same flow data as the right side decorative body 435 side and the like can be used, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data, and ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various luminescent effects of the lighting pattern to the player, and it is possible to show various luminescent effects with high effect to the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

In addition, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b that are provided with the first LED 422a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a in between are in the same system. , The first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a) so as to sandwich Since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a by the light from each of the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b is guided. The optical axis part 428a, the light guide axis part 429a, the light guide axis part 436a, and the light guide axis part 437a are thinned so as to be cancelled, and are projected on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated.

Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are light-emitted and decorated by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. A part corresponding to the front end of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a is illuminated and decorated with dots by the one LED 432a and the first LED 433a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as emitting light in spots while emitting light in a plane, and it emits bright dots. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player by the light emitting effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player "ha" by the light emitting effect that emits a spot light in a spot like the conventional pachinko machines, The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Further, one side (left side) in the left-right direction of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the other side (right side) of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower. Since the decorative board 433 and the decorative board 433 are asymmetrical with respect to each other at a glance, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame that are assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to avoid making a mistake in the right side lower decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Next, the door frame 3 will be taken as an example to identify in detail the various decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are shown. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as an example.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and LED drivers, connection connectors, and the like other than white that are mounted on the decoration board are mounted on the rear surface side of the board. I am trying. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the front decoration body can be made to emit light more brightly, and the front side (player side) Makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the plate material of the substrate itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decoration boards, different identification parts 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decoration board so that the decoration boards can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a formed of characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, and model numbers, and a color identification unit 7b formed of different colors (shown by shaded areas in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification portion 7a, the character "lower left" on the plate left decorative board 273, the character "lower right" on the plate right decorative board 278, and the "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. Is "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. On the door frame top central decorative board 455, the letters "upper middle", on the door frame top left decorative board 456, the letter "upper left", and on the door frame top right decorative board 457, the letter "upper right". , Respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but is partially provided so as not to hinder the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification portion 7 is provided on the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a seal, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like. The decorative substrate may also be provided with the identification unit 7 such as the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification portion 7 (the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to form a decoration board having a similar shape. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and the workability of the assembly can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made white as much as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be used. Light can be reflected to the front side on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body and the like lighter and brighter, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front side (player side), which makes it look good. You can get better.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is provided over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is possible to see a desired (desired color ) It is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative substrate is. Therefore, at the time of assembling, even if a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped with each other, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembling work is reduced. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative substrate, when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identifying portion 7b, it is possible to easily recognize that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is out of colors, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an unprepared decorative substrate. Therefore, when preparing a decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identifying portion 7a as the identifying portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the character of the character identifying portion 7a. Thus, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front side (player side), the appearance of the decoration body can be improved, and the white front surface of the decoration board reflects the light from the LED forward. Therefore, it is possible to make the decoration body brighter and lighter, and it is possible to entertain the player with a light-emitting effect having a high effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front side (the player side). It is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative body (game machine) from being deteriorated by being visible, and to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional component is made invisible by providing it on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional component in white (or yellow) to make it inconspicuous, and the functional component can be used as it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the labor of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Effect of door frame]
According to the present embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at positions different from each other in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of the player. And the contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394, so that when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. This means that the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, so that the player's approach or contact to a desired portion can be detected. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512 according to the detection of the contact detection sensor body 392. On the other hand, in the state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 at the desired portion are connected by the switching unit 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other portion. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detection body 393 will be disconnected. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, it is possible to reliably detect only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at a desired portion without detecting the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393. Therefore, false detection can be prevented.

As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, and the like. The control means can reduce the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player, and can relatively increase the number of channels that can be used for the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to control more effect means (for example, the movable decoration body, the light-emitting decoration body, the effect display device, etc.) by the control means, the player can be provided with a variety of effects by increasing the effect means. It can be presented, and the player can be prevented from getting tired, and the player can be fully entertained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are respectively provided at a plurality of portions of the pachinko machine 1 which are not desired to be touched by the player, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at desired portions by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. The contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, and control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, and the like. Since it is possible to leave predetermined cautions and warnings by means, the number of channels that can be used for performance is relatively increased while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392. The number can be increased, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the electrostatic capacitance by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having the electronic parts such as the sensor IC and the output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and appeal to the player. Can be increased.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has a connection terminal for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated easily. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and only by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 are connected. Since it is possible to connect to the contact detection sensor main body 392, a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode and the contact detection body 393 is connected via the conductive member. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the arrangement of the conductive member for connecting with the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be easily realized.

Further, since the switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided. When the player participation type effect is performed in which the plurality of distributed contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player sequentially touches. By switching the contact detection body 393 connected with the contact detection body 393, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection body 393 in order, and one player participation type effect with high game performance can be obtained. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which makes the player more entertaining.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of a metal plate of a metal plate whose side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. Therefore, the button main body via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (effect operation unit unit 350).

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit elevating and lowering. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board 364, and the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, so that the effect is entertained by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350, a predetermined effect is output, so that the effect detecting unit 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 cause the effect operation unit unit 350 to move to the non-contact operation unit or It can function as a contact operation unit. Then, since the player can press the production operation unit unit 350 that functions as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit when the production operation unit unit 350 is projected, the production operation unit unit 350 performs non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing. Since various performing operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and other pachinko machines It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making a distinction from the machine.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player side according to the detection of the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the electrostatic capacitance is the contact detection body 352 (button main body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity threshold values and output different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple stages, an effect corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection including the electronic parts such as the sensor IC and the output circuit. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and appeal to the player can be increased.

Further, as described above, since various effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, the player participation type effect that enables the effect operation of the player is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of production operations, it is possible to make the player less tired, and to entertain player participation type production, which reduces the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose electrostatic capacity is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player attaches to the button main body 351 by the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state where the contact detection body 352 is not approaching or touching, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in electrostatic capacitance, and therefore the button of the contact detection body 352 can be increased. It is possible to widen the range of detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above-described embodiment, the button body 351 (production operation unit unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged. When the contact detection body 352 has the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, so that the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the production operation unit unit 350 can be quickly operated, and it is possible to make it difficult to miss the operation timing in the player participation type production, and to surely participate in the player participation type production. The effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. A light emission effect from the LED 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the light emission effect can be surely entertained by the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the touch detection body 352 is provided in the production operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) that can be pressed, the touch detection body made of punching metal that is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The production operation unit unit 350 can be reinforced by 352, and the production operation unit unit 350 (button main body 351) is strongly pressed or tapped when the player performs a pressing operation, even if the production operation unit unit 350 is pressed. It is possible to make it difficult for 350 to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the production operation unit unit 350 from being easily damaged by the contact detection body 352, it is possible to allow the player to press the production operation unit unit 350 without being distracted and operate the production operation unit unit 350. It is possible to make the player participation type production more entertaining and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made thinner than in the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal formed by processing a metal plate having the same plate thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design, and the appeal to the player is higher. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detection body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to make the shape suitable for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350), and to realize the above-described operational effects reliably.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button main body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching it, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed, and at the same time, the button main body 351. It is possible to operate the button main body 351 without a sense of discomfort in the player participation type effect in which is used as the operation unit, and it is possible to entertain the effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button main body 351, dirt such as dust or food and drink is attached to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the time and effort required for cleaning can be simplified, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

In addition, the production means such as the outside-button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). Then, since a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit unit 350, and the effect is produced. It is possible to surely entertain the production output through (through) the operation unit unit 350 and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the production means such as the outside-button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the contact detection body 352 covers the rendering means because it is provided, and the contact detection body 352 (rendering operation unit unit 350) and the rendering means can be compactly assembled, the above description is provided. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can easily provide the effect operation unit unit 350 and effect means having the above-described effects at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1, and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided to be able to move forward and backward, thereby producing Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit unit 350 changes, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, the player approaches the effect operation unit unit 350. Alternatively, contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, when the effect operation unit unit 350 protrudes in a state where the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit unit 350. When the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected, an effect can be presented to the player by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by an effect that has not been found in the conventional pachinko machines, to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to make sure that the projection of the effect operation unit unit 350 is noticed.

When the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected, the lower spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the vertical spring 365 (upward), so that the vertical spring 365 is strongly compressed. The biasing force can be increased, and when the lifting spring 365 is moved in a direction away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 is weakened and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the effect operation unit unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the effect operation unit unit 350 can be projected with various projecting outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of effects by physical force, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and also to effect operations. The effect due to the protrusion of the unit 350 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the projection output of the effect operation unit unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit unit is strongly exerted. When 350 abuts, a strong impact is given to the player, and it is possible to strongly think that something good (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage) may occur. It is possible to increase the expectation for and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player is caused to press the effect operation unit unit 350, thereby playing the game. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the player-participating type production, and to entertain the press operation of the production operation unit unit 350 to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit unit 350 can be pressed, the player who puts his/her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) can be pressed at any time. Then, when the player participation type effect in which the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed is executed, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 causes the effect operation unit unit 350 to project, so that the effect image or sound is used for the player participation type. It is possible to promptly let the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type effect without guiding the execution start of the effect, and increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 to realize the player participation type effect. Can be even more entertaining.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to project by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, as compared with the case where the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to protrude using the drive motor. Thus, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described action and effect can be more easily exhibited.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350, and the electrostatic charge of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity threshold values and cause the effect operation unit unit 350 to project with a different projection output for each threshold value. Becomes Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, depending on each stage. By projecting with a sudden output, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, by popping up by executing the player participation type effect, the player is added to the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can move forward and backward. When is approached or touched, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 with which the player of the effect operation unit unit 350 comes into contact changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit unit 350 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, and thus the contact by the approach or contact of the player. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 can be detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, by the detection of the contact detection sensor body 358 and the player's advance/retreat (press) of the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button middle decoration substrate. A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, since the predetermined effect is executed by the player moving the effect operation unit unit 350 forward or backward or approaching or contacting the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect can entertain the player, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by the player.

At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit or contact operation unit). Can be made to work. On the other hand, when the player moves (presses) the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 can function as an effect operation unit (press operation unit). Because of this, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of effect operations, so by performing a player participation type effect that enables the player's effect operations, a variety of effect operations can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the player participation type production, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided in the vicinity of the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 with which the player comes into contact (below the upper surface 351a). Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of electrostatic capacity threshold values for executing a predetermined effect are provided, and each of them is provided. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach to the contact of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit unit 350 in multiple stages, and to present the effect according to each stage. Thus, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the (contact operation), and to make the player more entertaining the effect operation.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit unit 350 that can be moved forward and backward (pushable), a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit unit 350. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the player performs an operation (pushing operation) for advancing and retracting the production operation unit 350, and an operation for bringing a finger or the like close to or in contact with the production operation unit 350 (non-contact operation, contact operation). ) Various operations can be requested, and the various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player-participating performance, and facilitate the participation in the player-participating performance. You can Then, when the player participates in the player participation type effect, various operations using the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting tired. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit unit 350 is locked to the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the effect operation unit unit 350 in a forward and backward direction. Therefore, the effect operation unit unit 350 cannot be advanced or retracted by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371 until the effect operation for moving the effect operation unit unit 350 is executed. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel distrust or anxiety by the production operation unit unit 350 moving or shaking without permission, and to make the production by the production operation unit unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be set.

Further, in the rendering operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position distant from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor has electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit. The main body 358 can be provided at a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the electrostatic capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, and the like are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected independently of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be replaced by the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 which covers the decoration body 398 is attached to the player. When a finger or the like approaches or contacts with a finger or the like, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. The electrostatic capacity of the player changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect of irradiating the player with light is executed by the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398. Therefore, the player side The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 by the light emitted to the player, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is the button body 351 or Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 as if it were a part of the decoration portion. It can be made unrecognizable to the player that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is compared to the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (production) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the ornament 398 in a good state, which can entertain the player and prevent the entertainment from deteriorating.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the effect of irradiating the player with light is executed on the decorative board 355, the button-in-button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). 302) and can give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or touches the fingers or the like. When the touch is detected, the effect is executed by the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the type production.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like. Since it is possible to change the effect by the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 in accordance with the distance from the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button outside decoration substrate 355 can be moved by the movement (position) of the player's finger or the like. It is possible to change the effect produced by the or button middle decoration board 364 or the decorative body 398, and to show the player a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the.

Further, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button middle decoration substrate 364, and the decoration body 398 is changed, the game to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is performed. It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the change in the electrostatic capacitance is detected by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and by making the vapor deposition film thick to have metallic luster, it looks like a part of decoration. You can Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are punched metal having an outer shape having a design property such as a star shape and a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made to look like a part of the decoration. be able to. Because of this, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 that cannot be recognized by the player can be provided, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance is generated by the player's fingers or the like approaching or contacting the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). Depending on the change, the effect presentation means such as the button outside decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600 produce a predetermined effect. The contact detection body 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 397) for presenting Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance and a high appeal to the player can be provided. Further, the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and presentation is presented in accordance with a change in capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented by means of the means via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, the predetermined effect is presented according to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like with the button body 351. This means that the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design property, the performance operation unit 301 looks like a design property, which is not available in conventional pachinko machines. As the pachinko machine 1 including the operation unit 301, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detection body 395 or the like having a design property can give a strong impact to the player, the contact detection body 395 or the like (button body 351) can be strongly interested. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect for operating the button body 351 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 is formed in the outer peripheral shape having a design property, at the first glance, depending on the player, the presentation presentation is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is first effected by the contact detection body 395 or the like by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation unit 301, and to give the player unexpectedness to further enjoy the player participation type effect. Alternatively, when the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without knowing the production operation unit 301, the contact detection body 395 or the like is stopped. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like. It is possible to easily detect the approach and the contact, and it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects. Further, since the effect is presented in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like is contacted from the approach of the player's finger or the like. Since it is possible to detect up to (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a more diverse production to the player by presenting the production according to each stage, and the player can be presented. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, since the outer circumference of the contact detection body 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the contact detection body 395 or the like having conductivity, The contact detection body 395 and the like can be provided with a design property, the appearance of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above-described action and effect can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design having a design property without forming the contact detection body 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can have a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost required for manufacturing the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button main body 351, dust and food and dirt are not attached to the contact detection body 395 etc., and cleaning work is easy. It can be anything. More specifically, since the contact detection body 395 or the like having a concavo-convex shape such as punching metal is used, dirt and food and other stains are likely to adhere to the concavo-convex shape, and it is troublesome to clean the dirt. However, since the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 or the like having irregularities such as punching metal is used, By doing so, it is possible to prevent the attachment of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as an easily cleaned item.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection body 395 and the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like is used as the contact detection body 395 and the like. In the case of using a material such as a foil stamping which can improve the design, it is possible to prevent the player from wearing it early and to improve the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, since the player does not directly touch the contact detection body 395 etc. with the transparent button body 351, contact Since it is possible to use, as the detection body 395 or the like, a material having a bad touch or a material that gives the player an unpleasant feeling, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detection body 395 or the like and meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed of a corresponding material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like is changed by bringing the finger or the like of the player close or in contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the buttons, etc., the player has brought fingers or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 by the effects presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the action of fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, and the like, when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 is executed, the button body 351 can be made to function like a contact operation unit, and an operation feeling can be provided by the presented effect. Can be given, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type effect) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player brings the finger or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 to cause the contact detection body 352. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inside decoration board 364 emit light to play through the button body 351. A light emitting effect in which a player is irradiated with light, an effect of vibrating a player's finger or the like that is in contact through (via) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and a projection operation unit elevating mechanism 360 projects above the button body 351. With this, effects such as impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through (through) the button main body 351, so that the button main body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can enjoy themselves. I can do it. Further, at this time, since effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, the player can be surprised by the effect and entertain the player. Therefore, the motivation for operating the button body 351 can be increased. Then, when the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, by appropriately moving the fingers or the like to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. By the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, the player can enjoy various effect operations, and the player is less likely to get tired. Can be suppressed.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 separated from the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 prevents the button body 351 from moving. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like on the upper surface part 351a of the player, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with a detection circuit. Can be disposed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 which is separated from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be disposed on a less noticeable portion, and the pachinko machine can be used. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (downside) of the button body 351, the player can be lit up through the button body 351 with light or light. It is possible to easily apply effects such as vibration, impact, pushing up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, Main body lower hinge assembly in which the base unit 500 is attached to the lower end on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 which is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500 so that a game is played within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, a reverse L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is spaced apart from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and the ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward is provided, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a removable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a having a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and a total height of about 3/4 from a position slightly lower than an upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and that restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving leftward, rightward, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f which penetrates the front and rear on the right side of the front part of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear of the gaming board mounting portion 501c which penetrates the front and back on the lower left side in the front view. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end when viewed from the front, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 501 has a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame opening switch is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch releases the pressing and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the main frame 4. The detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

On the main body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the front and rear ends of the guide main body 502a that penetrate through the front and rear and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than a length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state where the guide body 502a of the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at the upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and in the state where the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are rearward. (See FIG. 83(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. An angle at which a tangent line to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main frame upper frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the front view in a horizontally extending portion and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an upper distance from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and also has a lower portion. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-section in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a which is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side which is formed in a U-shape with the right side open in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When the left reinforcing frame 111 is inserted into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes a meandering state in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with strength according to the turning angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543, the hitting solenoid 542 which is a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends through the shooting base 541 and which extends forward, the hitting hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the hitting solenoid 542, It is equipped with a launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle 195 is rotating, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downward downward, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From above to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a back plate upper part 551d, and from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side and extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. The bottom plate portion 551g extends to a position substantially the same as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and the connecting plate portion 551h connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open inward of the front and the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base portion 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and extending in the left-right direction and having a box shape that is open upward, and a portion extending in the left-right direction of the dispensing base 551. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

In addition, the payout base unit 550 is installed on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The ball tank 552 has a left end communicating with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes low at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B which is circulating in two stages by this rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 91).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide the guide path. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly folding back over the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing vane when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably mounted between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. The ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b is closed. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near a right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height from the top so that it gradually moves to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right widths and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer periphery of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape that is concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the discharge passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from above to the right side in rear view. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-removing movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at three intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in the portion extending from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. This allows the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b to be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 89).

When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball discharge passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball discharge passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payoff blade 589 for suppressing the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is more than the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

In this way, in the state in which the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent a strong force from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball removal movement due to the collision of the game ball B is possible. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and breakage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball-removing movable piece 592, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball-removing passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-moving movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-balloon passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the distance from the game ball B is smaller than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, so that the ball-ball moving movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 and a box-shaped upper front full base 601 that is attached to the rear side and has an open front side. Of the upper full tank cover 602, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in a front view and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of its overall width and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of its overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal delivery passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, adjacent to the upper ordinary delivery passage 600c and an upper portion. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are sequentially arranged and open downward from the left side in a front view. In the state where the upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens immediately below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 which can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. A biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower tank full ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in front view, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as the front view, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank ball passage unit 610, when assembled to the payout unit 560, has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, respectively. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 that is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied/stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball receiving path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 which is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. While the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the front, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is set to the non-detected state of the full tank detection sensor 154. Temporarily stop until.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding part 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the outside of the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side in the view, and the space front recess 621b which projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most to the rear. Are formed so as to have a small protrusion. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43 a so that the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. And the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, an enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly damped in the low frequency range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and it is possible to output a large sound with a deep bass sound even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 that is open upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball drop guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628 is discharged downward.

The upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is open to the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state in which the ball guide member 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long right and left. The bottom end of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guiding unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. 96), and. The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the side of the main body frame 4) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the main body frame base 501 extending in the vertical direction at a rear end thereof so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. The back cover mounting portion 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600 are mounted.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the payout base 551 is assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled in the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, whereby a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion of the main body frame in a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front side of (a). 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream side end, and a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 and downstream of the tank rail 553 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. Equipped with.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a plan view extending in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a inclined so that the left side thereof becomes lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b by about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Is formed over the entire length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game ball B is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed. Have The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left side in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends to the left side after extending from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis line that extends leftward from the right end side in the plan view. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction. .. The tank rail 553 has a main guide portion 553a in which a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width. The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to close the upper side. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b which bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and whose width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By the bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes one line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. Beveled corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. From this, in the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b that is curved three-dimensionally, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is less likely to disperse, the game ball B inside is constantly pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clogging). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows through the inside. By dispersing the pressing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be played, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, as described above. It is possible to achieve the effect of.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m that extends and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m extend rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m while being inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. And a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the outer sides of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open. The external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and the upper side of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) are covered, and the upper surface overflows. And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate from the lower position, which is 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B, from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, to the rear. It extends in a shape. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper portion is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both outer sides in the left and right direction of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, respectively, and extends in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. And a plurality of ribs 501p that are arranged in a row at a narrower interval than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m. The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Note that, hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lowered. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (side of the dam portion 552i) of the rear end side in a front view. It extends obliquely so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the left-right direction.

When the bypass passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and extending obliquely to the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end thereof moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the detour passage 552g moves the game ball B to the tank rail 553 side. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball debris in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide area.

In addition, the part that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this part, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from inside the ball tank 552. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side can be secured on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, and thus the detour passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b in front view. Approximately 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b extends obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of about ½ of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extends in the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d. It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c so as to extend from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about ⅓ of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction with a constant width.

The ball tank 552 has, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the right wall side end of the front wall 552b and the rear wall 552c. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. The ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely on the left side thereof and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction are positioned behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. In the ball tank 552, the discharge portion 551j is lowered stepwise toward the rear from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after extending to a nearby position).

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a mounted on the rear surface in a state of being aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion is opened by operating the lever and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge is crossed. Can be flown to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface 501m, and at the same time it can be flowed from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the inside of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent further increase of the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side which is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, so that the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is more than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the front end side overflow surface portion 501m to the rear side. It is possible to make the flow in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and it is possible to make the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the bypass passage 552g in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other to be bitten by the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of the jamming of the game balls B can be prevented. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are lined up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they head toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that have been stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of gaming balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

In addition, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no possibility that a short-circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring will occur due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the or the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is possible to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g by these inclinations, and a problem occurs due to the game ball B spilling outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked can be secured upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine provided with the tank rail and the like of the second embodiment in an enlarged manner showing a portion of the tank rail when viewed from behind. FIG. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, FIG. 107(b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3A is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the curve line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing in cross section the flow of the game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 553A and the like of the second embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A that are the same as the tank rail 553 of the above embodiment. , The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different, and the same configurations will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and transfers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward. The tank rail 553A is provided with a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The provided ball rectifying member 556A is attached, and a ball stopper member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107A, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. By the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed. The first rail cover 554A is attached on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction on the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A so as to cover from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protection walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends upstream of the center of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b is formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a sphere rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end extending in the front-rear direction and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protection walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A abuts against the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby making it easier to collapse the stages of the game balls B and align them in a line, and at the top. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side to prevent ball catching on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. ing. Thereby, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, It is possible to prevent the contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A. May not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A, When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the sphere rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action can be sufficiently exerted to catch the ball in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game ball B. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper gaming balls B among the gaming balls B stacked in a plurality of stages move to the downstream side first, ball catching easily occurs. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B may move to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging. Arranging near a terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or a control board to which electric wires are connected, or arranging a terminal board or a control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame including the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the right rear. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged part of the tank rail when the main body frame including the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the left rear. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 114(a) is a sectional view taken along line D-D in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a sectional view taken along line C-C in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). FIG. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear side, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of (a) from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 seen from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG.

The tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is the tank rail or the like of the above-described first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stopper member). 557), a protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added, and the same configurations as those described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals.

The tank rail and the like of the present embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and extend in the left and right directions. A tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the existing portion, is open upward, and extends to the left in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The ball tank 552 has a left end communicating with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes low at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening through which dust, dust, and the like in the tank rail 553 can drop on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion that becomes lower in height toward the downstream side). A plurality of parts 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is opened downward and rearward of the tank rail 553, extends leftward and rightward, and is formed in a size such that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B is present on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from the rear through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger or a thin stick through the opening 553d. This makes it possible to eliminate the ball clogging that has occurred at the site through the opening 553d. Further, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted through the opening 553d through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like closes to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range to the left from the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends leftward with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part from the portion spaced apart between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 to the left end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover at the upper end of the tank rail 553. The ball rectifying member 556 provided in a portion between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, the ball stopper member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 from the middle in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction across the ball rectifying member 556.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. ..

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a) and the like).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in a single stage, but when the stacked game balls B decrease from two stages to one stage, the upper game balls B are When attempting to overtake the lower game balls B, the game balls B may engage with each other and become immobile (so-called ball clogging due to ball clogging). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553 in two steps, the upper game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent trying to overtake the lower game ball B. As a result, the lower game balls B move to the downstream side first, and the upper game balls B move to the rear side, so that the game balls B can be aligned further. At this time, since the upper game sphere B presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and the game on the upper stage side due to its own weight. The ball B can be pressed downward, and by vertically swinging the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a), the upper side of the game ball B can be promoted to move to the lower side and the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the relevant portion of 553 (the portion whose height becomes lower toward the downstream side).

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-shaped top plate portion 559a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of a rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. Has a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side, and a flat plate-shaped guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The guide plate portion 559d is formed such that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left side, and the rear end of the portion is aligned with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. Therefore, a space is formed between the ball straightening member 556 and the ball straightening member 556 so as to be vertically swingable. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends to the right of the top plate portion 559a, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553. The guide plate portion 559d has a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a that protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c by a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, so that the game ball B can be guided to the left. Has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the inclination of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap with the rear surface of the payout base 551 so that the game ball B cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent external contact with the ball rectifying member 556 in a state where the protective cover 559 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and contacting it from below, or by inserting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d. It can be confirmed by pushing the game ball B upward by pushing the game ball B or the like.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, to the left and guide it to the outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559d. ..

In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, and the like are formed of a transparent material. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Further, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, and the like from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Moreover, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, the ball rectifying member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dust or dirt adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, and the like, but in the present embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided on the bottom. More specifically, if dust, dust, etc. are attached to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the game ball B inside is touched through the opening 553d and the game ball B or the game ball B is passed through. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be swung, dust and dirt attached to the game ball B and the like can be dropped. Then, dust, dust, and the like dropped from the game ball B or the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant depth is provided behind the external terminal plate 558, so the wire connection terminal 558 a of the external terminal plate 558 a. When the electric wire connected to the ball contacts the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the ball rectifying member 556 rotates upward even if the game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 due to the weight of the electric wire. There is a risk that it will not be possible, and there will be a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556 cannot be fully exerted.

Further, since the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to the electric wire whose tip is stripped off, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, the electric wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, a short circuit may occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connecting terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556. can do. With this, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the sphere rectifying member 556, the sphere rectifying member 556 can be rotated upward, so that the rectifying action can be sufficiently exerted and the rectifying action can be achieved in the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, when the electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal board 558 for some reason and its tip comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal board 558, a computer in the game hall provides necessary information due to the occurrence of a short circuit. I can not receive it, and there is an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate portion 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body. It can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the frame 4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding the short circuit of the electric wire, the necessary information can be surely received by the computer in the gaming hall (hall controller), and the occurrence of counting error in the gaming hall can be suppressed. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side surface side of the main body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559, the game ball B is located behind the main body frame 4. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as disconnection or short-circuit by coming into contact with various electric wires or wirings provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Board Unit]
Subsequently, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. FIG. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 119(a) as seen from the back. FIG. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line in (a), and (c) is (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the kee line in FIG. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine including the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the board unit 620 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board placing portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The base unit 660 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and the rear side of the front base 661, and the power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface. A rear base 662, an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 flows, and a game flowing through the out ball passage 663. An out sensor 664 for detecting the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling-out guiding section 627 which receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball-drawing passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right in a front view, The game ball B guided by the ball drop guide 627 circulates, and the ball drop discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball drop discharge passage 665 are closed. And a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and is long in the left and right. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending in the left-right direction at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. In addition, the ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is opened rearward.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the insides of the ball guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized well from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660, and it is easy to confirm the ball clogging and the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed in the front side of the rear base 662 in the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending in the vertical direction in the vertical direction at a substantially constant height in a state where the front side is open and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is opened upward and extends left and right at a position substantially centrally in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the lower guide portion 663c, an out ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, a lower guide portion 663c that guides the game balls B that are rectified in a row by the out ball rectifying portion 663b, and a lower guide portion 663c. It is opened downward, and has an out ball discharge port 663d for discharging the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side becomes lower.

The out-ball rectifying portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle such that the left end becomes lower from the position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. Further, the out-ball rectifying portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B near the downstream end that is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It is deep. Further, in the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, a portion on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height as it goes to the downstream side (left side), and near the downstream end, the gaming ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. This allows the game balls B to be aligned in a line in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partitioning wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. The curve is curved in a small crank shape toward the rear. As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guiding portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the lower guiding portion 663c. The lower guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the crank-shaped portion does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, and therefore passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in the crank shape. Even if the game ball B abuts on the existing part, it does not bounce upward to the side of the out sensor 664, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is durable and has a long life because the game ball B frequently passes therethrough.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out-ball passage 663. In the hollow guide portion 627, the upstream end is open to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, the downstream side is bent backward, and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , And is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being opened rearward, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The ball discharge passage 665 has a rear end located forward of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, between the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed.

An upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to a downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, the inclination is the same as that of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge receiving portion 663a is smaller than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending rightward, a vertical guide portion 665b vertically downwardly extending from a downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a to a lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ), a ball discharge outlet 665c opening downward. The ball discharge outlet 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

Further, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b at regular intervals in the vertical direction. In the ball discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward alternately abuts the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and flows. It is possible to suppress an increase in speed, and it is possible to suppress the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge outlet 665c.

Since this ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage made up of the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball discharge lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , A lot of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and then the out sensor 664 is received. It is detected by and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side is operated by operating the ball discharge lever 593 of the dispensing device 580, and the out ball passage 663. The balls are discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball-induction guiding section 627 and the ball-out discharge passage 665 which are separated from each other. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is accurately performed. Can be counted. Therefore, by the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, an accurate game ball B The pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating the payout rate (ball payout rate) can be provided.

The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is struck in the game area 5a to be a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, a first opening. The number of gaming balls B received from the winning holes such as the big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc. and discharged from the game board 5 and the winning holes after being hit in the game area 5a. The number of game balls B received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5 without being added, and the number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). It is.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the gaming state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is "payout within a predetermined period. The number of out-balls within a predetermined period=the payout rate within a predetermined period” is calculated.

Further, according to this embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the out ball. The game ball B flowing in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the "out ball" is detected on the game board 5. There is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided between the rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. Therefore, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are filled with many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like due to the electrical noise generated by the distribution of static electricity, the induced current, and the like, and the pachinko machine 1 which is less likely to malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out sensor 664 is worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the player, Since the player wants to pay out a lot of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to pay out a lot of game balls B. It is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. Further, in the case where the payout rate is visibly displayed from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out, the displayed payout rate becomes higher than usual. , Another player or a staff member of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice an illegal act, so that he/she can hesitate to execute the illegal act, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent against the illegal act. Can be

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible to the player, the staff in the game hall, etc. can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraud. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay) Since it is possible that there is a problem with the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Furthermore, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out ball detection unit), the cost required for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space for the structure for detecting the discharged game ball B is secured in the game board 5. By providing the production device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be more entertained by the player.

In addition, since the ball discharge passage 665 has a vertical guiding portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B flows through the vertical guiding portion 665b, so that the game ball B flows. Since the speed can be suppressed, the inside of the ball discharge passage 665 is damaged by the impact of the circulating game ball B, or the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665 is damaged. Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying portion 663b meandering in the out-ball passage 663 is provided, and the vertical guiding portion 665b in which a plurality of projections 665d are projected is provided in the ball-out discharge passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the electric ball, it is possible to reduce electric noise emitted from the game ball B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like that are present, and to make the pachinko machine 1 less likely to malfunction due to the circulation of the game ball B.

Further, since the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out discharge passage 665 have their respective out-ball outlets 663d and 665c opened downward, the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out discharge passages are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with other pachinko machines and walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, in the game board 5, Since it is possible to deliver the game ball B driven into the area 5a downward to the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, the structure for discharging the game ball B in the game board 5 is set. , A simple (simple) configuration can be achieved, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge outlet 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided rearward of the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are not provided. Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 vigorously collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge outlet 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to advance the OUT receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and the labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another Embodiment of Sphere Ejection in Board Unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball discharge passage 665 is provided near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is opened downward, and its opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball-removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects rearward from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d for a short period of time.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward. .. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, a portion (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island facility) of the island facility. It is possible to easily release the game ball B to the side), and it is possible to reliably collect the game ball B on the island facility side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the guide piece 667 can direct the discharge direction of the game ball B obliquely rearward and downward, so that the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to a position immediately below the game area 5a (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, it is possible to arrange the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) at the front position as much as possible, so that the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and due to the static electricity generated by many game balls B flowing through the out-ball passage 663 and the electrical noise due to the induced current or the like. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be less likely to malfunction due to the circulation of the game ball B.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out sensor 664 can be attached/detached from below to a portion of the out ball passage 663 at the out ball outlet 663d. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the lower guiding portion 663c in the out-ball passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. And a sensor cover 668 for restricting the downward movement of 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at a lower end portion of the lower guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f, and has a base end rotatably mounted to the base unit 660 and a detection of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f of the main body 668a. A through hole 668b that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body portion 668a. Have

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outer side opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b at the base end side. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b.

The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g to close it, the main body portion 668a abuts the lower surface of the out sensor 664, and the downward movement of the out sensor 664 is regulated. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then the through hole 668b. Through which it is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw 668c to release the locking with the locking part 663g. Then, by rotating the sensor cover 668 about the base end side of the main body portion 668a so as to move the locking claw portion 668c downward, the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 is moved to the lower surface of the out sensor 664. Then, the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126B, in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end (for example, the outer frame 2) of the contact feared object indicated by the chain double-dashed line. To the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the rear curtain plate member 43, or the lower end of the main body frame 4 to some extent. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the dangerous contact object, and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. However, as described above, since the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact threatened object such as the outer frame 2. Instead, the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may be disengaged due to the vibration due to, and the sensor cover 668 may be opened. When the sensor cover 668 opens during the game and the out sensor 664 falls off downward, the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Since this is not done, the occurrence of an abnormality will be notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Due to the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality, a staff member in the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality. However, the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the like, the main body frame 4 can be opened and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact concern.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer side portion of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be satisfactorily viewed from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is clogged in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is clogged can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down to stand upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom surface side through the transparent base unit 660 can be used. It is possible to easily perform a check operation inside or inside the ball discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted early. , It is possible to alleviate the frustration of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress a decrease in interest, and it is also possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. it can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even when the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 can be removed from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the base unit 660 is an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B flow, and is provided around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). Since the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward distribution of force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 by the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). Of the base unit 660 and becomes relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) that is locked by the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as a result of a large number of game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the one is rotatably attached at the one end side. Since a large amount can be received, it becomes difficult to release the locking by the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Board Unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 of a third embodiment different from the above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment showing the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit omitted from the front right, and FIG. 127(b) is the board unit of FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. 128A is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128B is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127A as viewed from the lower right rear. 129(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX in FIG. 127(a), and FIG. FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line, and FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line indicated by a line in FIG.

131 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the back. FIG. 133(a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the front, and FIG. 133(b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the back. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of intrusion of a linear illegal tool in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 127.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment is different from the above-described substrate unit 620 and substrate unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same, so here, the above-described substrate unit 620 and The same components as those of the board unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The board unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 and the first ball path 701 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 can flow, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. A second ball path 702 through which the game ball B can be distributed, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701, and a game ball circulating through the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 for detecting B, and a ball drop passage 705 through which the game ball B discharged from the lower ball drop passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows are provided. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect the game balls B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, in the game board 5, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 flows through the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 receives the general winning a prize. The game ball B received in the mouth 2001, the first start opening 2004, the second start opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to flow through the second ball path 702. ing. That is, the out sphere is configured to flow in the first sphere path 701 and the safe sphere to flow in the second sphere path 702, and the number of all out spheres can be counted by the first sphere sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe spheres can be counted by the second sphere sensor 704. Thereby, with respect to the winning holes (winning hole sensor) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 of the game board 5. When an illegal act is performed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 are different, and it is possible to detect an illegal act for a winning opening. ..

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear side, and on the rear side of the front base 711. The first base path 701 and the second base path 702 are provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and the rear base 712 having the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface and having the ball removal passage 705. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and to prevent the intrusion of the wrong tool. A cover 714 that is openable and closable, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, and is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. And a frame relay board 716 which is installed. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear and above and is long in the left and right. The ball path member 713 is housed in the front base 711 from the inside. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination opening 711b that is open at a position to the right of the left-right center of the lower peripheral wall portion. ing. The front base 711 houses the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 rotatably around an axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear and is long in the left and right. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610, guides it to the right in front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705, Have The ball passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and the whole is opened rearward. The ball passage 705 is closed at the rear end side by a passage wall member 715. A portion of the rear base 712 that is located above the speaker box 623 in the hollow passage 705 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In addition, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and the second of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guide portion 712b that receives the game ball B flowing through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b project forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide portion 712a is open forward. The inlet of the second discharge guide portion 712b is open upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b are opened rearward from the front wall and closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the front base 711 in the front view with respect to the elimination port 711b. Are arranged in order from to right. The outlet of the ball discharge passage 705 has a front end side that greatly expands forward and a rear end side that expands slightly rearward with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (FIG. 128(b). See)). That is, the outlet of the ball passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear side. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a that vertically extends downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b that slopes downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , A step wall portion 713c vertically extending downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right, A straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a position separating from the right side to the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e to the right and becoming higher toward the right side and the upper right shelf. A lower shelf portion 713f extending rightward from the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g vertically extending upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right An upper wall portion 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shape that is connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and is open upward. And the groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713j extending from the lower end of the flow regulating wall portion 713e to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The protruding middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k toward the left side, and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has a depending wall part 713m extending and a lower wall part lower part 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall part 713m in parallel to the lower wall part upper part 713j. A portion located below the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f in the lower wall portion lower 713n is vertically cut with a size through which the game ball B can pass.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, and is provided with a plurality of obstacles provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes the left wall portion 713a, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the step wall portion 713c, the upper right shelf portion 713d, the flow regulating wall portion 713e, the lower shelf portion 713f, the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, It has a plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

In addition, the ball path member 713 is a plurality of notches that are recessed from the front and rear ends of the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f toward the partition wall 713p. Has a notch 713q. Each notch portion 713q is provided so as to form a gap in the front-back direction smaller than the radius of the game ball B between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled in the board unit 700. Dust, dust and the like in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a site between the flow regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall upper part 713j, the hanging wall part 713m, and the lower wall part lower part 713n on the front side of the partition wall part 713p, and the first ball sensor 703 is housed in the sensor housing. The front part 713s and the rear side of the partition wall part 713p are surrounded by the lower wall upper part 713j, the hanging wall part 713m, and the lower wall part lower part 713n, and the second ball sensor 704 is housed in the rear part of the sensor housing part. 713t.

The detection holes of the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are located below the site between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although illustration is omitted, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend leftward from the inner wall portion 713k from the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t. ..

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion of the lower surface of the lower wall lower portion 713n in front of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a first ball guiding portion 713u protruding downward and opened rearward, Have When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is the inlet side of the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. In the front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right and then to the rear, It can be delivered to the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, a portion that is opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing portion rear 713t). ) Is located below the second discharge guide portion 712 b of the rear base 712. Thereby, behind the partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can be delivered to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located closer to the right than the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the upper portion of the front base 711 immediately above the elimination port 711b is covered with the flow regulating wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side is directed vertically downward. The distance (height) between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so that the left end side becomes a height at which one gaming ball B can pass, and becomes narrower toward the left. .. With this straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, it is possible to straighten a plurality of game balls B in a row and guide them downward.

Between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, as described above, since the upper and lower dimensions are narrowed toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B flows), the game Depending on the amount of circulation of the balls B, a plurality of game balls B may be caught between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging may occur (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the elimination port 711b, when a ball clogging occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the elimination port 711b. In the opened state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the elimination port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B is bitten by the tool. You can eliminate the ball clogging by hitting.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a cutout portion 713q for removing a ball clogging or dropping dust or dust downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. From above into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702) through the notch 713q, and the tip of the incorrect tool is further moved to the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk that fraudulent acts will be performed on the game board 5 provided above by extending the ball path 702) upward. The insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf 713b and the upper right shelf 713d provided with the cutouts 713q.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, a plurality of flat plate-shaped obstruction ribs 713o that are separated in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of the linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, it comes into contact with the inhibition rib 713o and the tip Movement can be blocked and further insertion of tampering tools can be blocked (see Figure 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the right side of the middle wall portion 713k in the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower and left and right sides thereof are the straightening wall portion 713e not provided with the cutout portion 713q and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the inner wall part 713k, an incorrect tool is not inserted from below through the cutouts 713q of the corresponding parts of the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, and the part of the part concerned is not inserted. No fraudulent activity is performed through the cutout portion 713q.

As described above, since the ball path member 713 is provided with the plurality of cutouts 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, dust and dust are directed downward through the cutouts 713q. (See FIG. 136). The dust or the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is the rectifying wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle. It is housed in the space surrounded by the wall portion 713k. This prevents dust and the like from adhering to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 accommodated in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

A wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end sides of the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 accommodated in the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 project to the left of the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from a portion above the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper left shelf portion 713b. Dust or dust that has dropped downward through the cutout portion 713q is guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l, and the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 protruding leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect caused by dust or the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a straightening wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, and The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 is formed. Left side wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, and rear base 712. The second discharge guide portion 712b forms a second ball path 702.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 such that the front end side is rotatable about an axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b in a state where the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. Is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward, and is made vertical, the elimination port 711b is opened. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the crime prevention cover 714 can close the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the crime prevention cover 714, a linear incorrect tool is introduced from the elimination port 711b into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the first ball path 701). It can be prevented from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when a ball clogging occurs between the flow regulating wall portion 713e of the ball path member 713 and the lower shelf portion 713f, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the elimination port 711b and the cutout portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B. You can The work of eliminating the ball clogging is performed with the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In this security cover 714, the lower end (end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of the crime prevention cover 714 when the elimination port 711b is opened (vertical state) is a contact threat (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the member 43 (the height indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 with the security cover 714 open. Even if the user tries to close the outer frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact threatened object (the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. Thus, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and the security cover 714 can be surely closed so that the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. However, the threatened contact object comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably attached about the axis in the left-right direction, the threatened contact object from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when is contacted with, the body frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the dangerous contact object, and the damage of the security cover 714 or the dangerous contact object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is rarely clogged with the game ball B between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically closed. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the first discharge guide portion 712a. The game ball B flowing through the second discharge guide portion 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704, and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129(a), the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 are partially separated from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. It faces the upper side and can receive all the game balls B emitted downward from the game board 5. The game ball B dropped to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d to the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the lower shelf 713f rolls to the left on the lower shelf 713f. At this time, when a plurality of game balls B are vertically stacked on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are collapsed by the upper flow straightening wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that rolls the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is housed in the sensor housing portion front 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guiding portion 713u, the ball is discharged downward through the first discharging guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t, it is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. To be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulates through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and is discharged downward. The front side is defined as the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is defined as the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B dropped from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B dropped from the game board 5 rearward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

Further, the base unit 710 removes the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and outputs the game ball B to the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Can be discharged downward. The game ball B discharged downward from the first discharge guide 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide 712b (second ball path 702) of the base unit 710, and the ball passage 705 is an island facility. The game ball B on the side is delivered to a part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting.

According to the base unit 710 in the board unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with the plurality of cutouts 713q, dust is passed through the cutouts 713q. Since dust and the like can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the circulation of the game ball B, and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging or the like. Can be made.

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 causes the game board to be opened. By removing 5 from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700) from above the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B Can be easily confirmed. And since the cutout 713q is provided in the lower shelf 713f at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a line by the straightening wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f in the ball path member 713, the straightening wall 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When a ball clogging occurs with the portion 713f, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool is inserted from below through the elimination port 711b and the cutout portion 713q. It can be inserted between the flow regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Further, the lower shelf 713f is provided with a solution opening 711b that is opened downward and a security cover 714 that closes the solution opening 711b at a position below the flow regulating wall 713e. In addition to being able to eliminate the ball clogging as described above, in a normal state, by closing the elimination port 711b with the security cover 714, a linear illegal tool can be used from the elimination port 711b to prevent the linear fraudulent tool from the first ball path 701 or It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and having a high deterrent against fraud.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the front end side about the axis in the left-right direction, the main body frame 4 can be opened without closing the security cover 714. When attempting to close the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact threatened object (the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43) and the body frame 4 cannot be closed. It can be noticed that the security cover is forgotten to be closed, and the security cover 714 can be surely closed so that the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

Further, since a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h so as to be separated in the left-right direction and extend downward, Even if the tip of the illegal tool of 1 tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, it can come into contact with the inhibition rib 713o to prevent the movement of the tip. It is possible to prevent further insertion of an illegal tool. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Therefore, even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b, the complicated route prevents the intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 are detected. There is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detecting unit) for detecting, and the cost required for the game board 5 can be reduced, and in the game board 5, for detecting the game ball B discharged. It becomes possible to secure a space corresponding to the configuration, and by providing a production device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

In addition, since the out ball on the first ball path 701 and the safe ball on the second ball path 702 respectively circulate, the safe ball count number in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704. It is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed on the game board 5 by comparing it with the counted number, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against the fraudulent act.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the player, Since the player wants to pay out a lot of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to pay out a lot of game balls B. It is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. Further, in the case where the payout rate is visibly displayed from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out, the displayed payout rate becomes higher than usual. , Another player or a staff member of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice an illegal act, so that he/she can hesitate to execute the illegal act, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent against the illegal act. Can be

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible to the player, the staff in the game hall, etc. can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraud. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay) Since it is possible that there is a problem with the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. In, the game ball B without the ball is not counted. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B emitted from the game board 5.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the out-ball and the safe ball flow through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 is provided. The safe balls may be arranged so that the out balls flow through the second ball path 702, respectively, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is the first ball path 701 and the second ball regardless of the safe ball and the out ball. Any of the ball paths 702 may be used for distribution.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the solution opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the crime prevention cover 714, but the invention is not limited to this. Good as a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is divided into two parts, that is, before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although it is shown that the ball is discharged through any one of the three ball paths, the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 seen from the front right side, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 seen from the left front side, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. .. FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory and the like made transparent. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general prize hole 2001, a gate 2002, a variable prize hole 2003, which gives a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B, A first start opening 2004, a second start opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a second big winning opening 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a second winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. It is for playing a game that allows the player to enter the handle 195 and to distribute the game ball B in the game area 5a so that it can be received or passed through the two major winning openings 2007 and the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and whose outer shape is a substantially square shape in front view, and defines the rear end of the game region 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 145 to FIG. 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and the game is mounted by mounting the game ball B on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160 and the like) for controlling the contents.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000, which is provided.

The effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game balls B driven into the game area 5a and are always open. The gate 2002 which detects the passage of the game ball B, and the variable winning port 2003 which allows the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with the lottery result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. And, a first starting port 2004 and a second starting port 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The first special winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first prize. According to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting mouth 2004 or the second starting mouth 2005. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2007 capable of accepting the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) for detecting magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, which are respectively provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B. ..

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2004, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has four general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly above the left side unit. 2300, and a lower right unit 2400 that is provided on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100 that is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a and that has a second starting opening 2005 and a second sub-out opening 2022. It is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a special winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a, and the gate 2002 And a gate member 2600 having

The table unit 2000 is provided in the right part of the game area 5a and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 including a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall, and a back wall of the back box 3010. A rear box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back substrate unit 3040 arranged behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 are provided. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower portion near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 in which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows and the front end in the back box 3010. Inside the back box 3010, a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided inside the back box 3010, a back front front effect unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the front front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction. In the back lower front effect unit 3200 provided in the lower rear of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 and in the back box 3010, the back rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300 (FIG. 155)) and a back lower back effect unit 3600 provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape along a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to an upper right diagonal position after passing through a center upper end in the left and right direction in front view. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. The backflow preventing member is rotated only in the open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is rotated and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guide portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 penetrate the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a functional display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the functional display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

In addition, the front constituent member 1000 is formed substantially transparent, and the game panel 1100, the rear unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 145 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the plate thickness is thin. And a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 (see FIG. 148). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. Is.

In the panel plate 1110, a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper side of the center in a front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the flow direction (circumferential direction of the frame) of the game ball B is left, except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of projecting pins that project forward from the holding step and are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and outside the holding step. The three engaging claws that are arranged and elastically engage with the engaging step portions 1114 in the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. It is provided with a pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging step portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above and moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to incline the upper side and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion 1114 of the engaged portion with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding stepped portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and thus the player. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the game area 5a, and it is possible to make the game area 5a appear large (wide) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player side). By doing so, it can appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. From the discharge portion 1201 formed in the above, it can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 141, 143, 144, and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted) It can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a first big winning opening sensor 2525, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2561, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524, the second big winning opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value, a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the setting value, The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the set value is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connector-connected (inter-board connection) with the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is a harness. Via, may be electrically connected). By this connector connection (board-to-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 is the same. The center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the centerlines passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center line of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder for rotating a setting key by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a setting having a pressing operation portion above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that has a switching button 1311b and can emit a single color (for example, red) to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b) on the center line of the setting changing board 1311. 1311c is arranged. A setting indicator 1310g consisting of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged near the connector MSCN above the center line of the main control board 1310. A base monitor 1310h, which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line from the center to the right side, is arranged at a position closer to the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation section is arranged in the.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port extends in the vertical direction). At the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted in the insertion port, another line is installed in the island facility of the game hall in the opposite direction. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility in the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. Input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing the second ON operation. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is turned on. The setting key cylinder 1311a is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions having a setting key ON function and a determination key ON function, which are completely different from each other, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. With only the setting key switch 1311a alone, the operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed together.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are inserted through the openings formed in the corresponding cover bodies of the main control board box 1320. "Gap" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the openings corresponding to each other, though they are exposed. In order to prevent modification of the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 by intruding a wire or the like from the wire, a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed in the cover body for these openings. .. The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, but the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch As a routing of the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b, keep them away from each other on the setting change substrate 1311 (separate from each other). In addition to being formed, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. In the main control board 1310, various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed. Wiring pattern (that is, a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). Of the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from is also formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a brief description will be given of a case where the setting value is changed, and a brief description will be given of a case where the current setting value is confirmed and displayed. Since the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting values that have been set in addition to changing the setting values, only limited people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure), power is restored to the outer frame 2 with respect to the main frame. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the outer frame 2 Setting is performed by opening the main body frame 4, then inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotating clockwise by 60 degrees, and performing the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. The "predetermined set value change permission condition" may be a condition that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and an operation signal is input. That is, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 and power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), and the setting key switch 1311a When the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and The setting change of the set value may be executable when the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

The person who changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then the main body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. Setting is performed by opening the setting key, inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a turns on the setting key. Then, the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state.

When the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change from the setting change board 1311. Is input to. Every time a person who performs setting change of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a causes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the set value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the set value is increased again by 1 and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the setting key is turned on). Rotate by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the cylinder rotation position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then perform the OFF operation. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a.

It should be noted that the setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder). When the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder turning position (turning off), the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, the setting key switch 1311a is simply turned off to determine the setting value and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder as it is. It becomes possible to improve workability.

A person who changes the setting of the set value returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose decision key is ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from a lighted state to a non-lighted state.

The person who changes the setting of the set value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, the outer frame 2 is set after the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to make the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the “predetermined set value display permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. In other words, the person who actually performs the confirmation display of the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). , The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first operation. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the set value currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. This turns on the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, even if the setting change permission lamp 1311c is kept turned off and the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operation is not performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

After confirming the currently set setting value, the person who performs confirmation display of the currently set setting value turns the setting key switch 1311a to the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned to the turning position of the setting key cylinder). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set set value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the current setting. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is the power after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). When the power is restored at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise. While it is necessary for the setting key to be turned on by being turned 60 degrees and then turned on for the first time, the predetermined set value display permission condition is that the pachinko machine is operated as described above. After the power is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. It is necessary that the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON for the first ON operation so that the setting key is turned ON. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is inserted into the setting key, the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the setting key is turned ON by the first ON operation. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires “at the time of power recovery”, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires “after power recovery”.

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" means, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery and the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit, from the time of probability change to normal. It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when moving to time, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous for the player (that is, what the player acquires The probability that the number of game balls B that can be played can be increased) (advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as the set values, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol). Big hit symbol determination table that stipulates the determination value ratio of the determination, small hit determination table that stipulates the percentage of the small hit determination value that indicates that you have won a small hit, stipulates the determination value ratio of the small hit symbol determination The small hit symbol determination table to be used, the normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability change time to the normal time is specified), and is used in various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which a distribution time is defined, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like) are selected. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, the various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned set values, six set values (integers) in the range from the set value 1 to the set value 6 have been described, but the set values may be smaller or larger than the set values. It may be one. For example, there may be four set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g displays the set value, and at the time of power recovery, the main control MPU 1310a checks the contents of the RAM incorporated therein to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the power-off process on the main control side does not end normally when the power is shut off, there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM built in itself (or you trust it). Cannot be done), and an error message is displayed to inform that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 among the game balls B shot in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched in the game area 5a, the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160 and the like), and this detection signal is mainly transmitted via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). It was possible to input the decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position to the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on may be used. In this case, the counterclockwise switch is used to return the setting key switch 1311a′ from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). The setting key switch 1311a′ can be turned on by the decision key ON by rotating the setting key switch 1311a′ by turning it by 60 degrees in the direction, and the signal of this decision key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be described as “modification example (1) of the enter key” in some cases).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. However, the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation section. A determination key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation part of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part is provided in the cover body so that the wire cannot be modified from the opening and the "clearance" formed in the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The structure will be molded. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The position of the decision key button on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or may be near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to the decision key button and the setting change button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting change button 1311b are not confused with each other. Is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation part of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part. It is necessary to open the cover.), the color of the pressing operation portion may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. It is possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switch button 1311b are laid out to prevent unauthorized modification. Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) in the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not come close to each other ( (Separated from each other). Further, when the setting key board is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a′ that can be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as “modification example (2) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). However, the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the handle unit 180 in the handle unit 180 has a palm or a palm. A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a detection from a one-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. A signal may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger touches the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger does not touch the handle 195. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and/or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. While it can be determined that there is, when it is not forcibly stopped the launch of the game ball B, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) Good)) may be referred to as a “variation example (3) of the determination key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633 described later. From the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b, the firing reference pulse is branched in the payout control board 633 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the determination key is based on these firing reference pulses. The presence/absence of ON may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B per minute to be launched toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, and the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be referred to as “decision key modification (4)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). Although the signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the movement of the player seated on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the distance measuring sensor that can be provided is provided in the game board 5 and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor It may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension, The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, whereby the motion of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input through the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on this detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no motion, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be referred to as a “variant (5) of the enter key”). ..

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder moves counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a and turning the setting key switch 1311a ON from the initial position (that is, the setting The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF is transmitted as serial information to the outside. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311. However, instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. .. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the decision key ON from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the serial circuit may be referred to as a “variation example (6) of the enter key”).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on with the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder moves counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a and turning the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting position) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is turned on. It is possible to turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON and OFF is transmitted as a pulse signal to the outside. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. .. The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has, for example, a pulse width of 1 ms when it is information for transmitting the setting key ON, and a pulse width of 3 ms when it is information for transmitting the determination key ON. If the information is OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON, the enter key ON, from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the two is OFF or OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be referred to as a “variation example (7) of the enter key”).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on with the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder moves counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a and turning the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting position) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is turned on. The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the OFF key The voltage level of the signal is set in the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V among zero V to 5V) between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a causes the setting key ON signal ON/OFF, the determination key ON signal ON/OFF, and the OFF signal OFF. ON/OFF of may be determined. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be referred to as a “variation example (8) of the determination key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the pressing operation part of the enter key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover so as to prevent the wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening, and modifying the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The position where the determination key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation portion described later. The cover body of the payout control board 633 is provided with a sticker printed with the name of each button at a position corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused with each other. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the decision key button with the error release switch, a button with a cover for covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation part is operated. Is required to be opened.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the pressing operation part. Different from each other may be adopted, or another type of switch which does not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button may be adopted. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision control button 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the decision pattern is provided as a wiring between the decision key button wiring pattern and the error release switch wiring pattern. The control board 633 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are also kept close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a′ that can be used may be described (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation example (9) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON is determined based on this signal. Good. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed the start-up after the power is restored (when the various control boards are powered on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant (10) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the command of the payout control unit power-on process described below is generated. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed the start-up after the power is restored (when the various control boards are powered on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and the payout control MPU informs that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives the command to that effect. If so, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant (11) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the original position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 1311a is set to the OFF position by turning the setting key cylinder to the OFF position) by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, and then turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it on) second ON operation By doing so, the enter key ON of the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 and branched in the payout control board 633. The presence/absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633 and the main control MPU 1310a being input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change capable of changing the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can turn on the enter key when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. You can As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on.

The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The wire intrusion prevention portion covers the opening so that the wire or the like cannot be intruded through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding thereto to modify the dispensing control board 633. The structure will be molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. The cover body of the payout control board 633 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at a position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused with each other. Affixed (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover for covering the pressing operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the pressing operation unit It is necessary to open the cover.), the color of the pressing operation portion may be different, the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, or the pressing operation. It is possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or as the RAM clear switch 1310f, another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part. Examples of other types of RAM clear switch 1310f that do not have a pressing operation unit include a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Various switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are laid out in order to prevent unauthorized modification. Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other) in the payout control board 633, and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error clear switch is transmitted are also kept close to each other (mutually). Are formed separately. When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as a “variation (12) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) that is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 1311a is set to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to turn off), and is turned off by rotating counterclockwise by 60 degrees, and further turned by 60 degrees counterclockwise) Second ON operation By doing so, the enter key ON of the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 to the port input of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which receives the command, monitors the process, creates a command, sends the command created in the command sending process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, to the main control board 1310, and The presence/absence of the decision key ON may be determined. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change capable of changing the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated and a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f included in the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of (3) and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thus, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned ON (the mode 2 of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included)) is referred to as “modification example (13) of the enter key”. May be stated).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the signal of the decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these input signals, or the logic of detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described below, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described below. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which has transmitted this command to the main control board 1310 and receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “variation (16) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is changed from the main frame opening switch. It is possible to determine that the determination key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal of, while the body frame 4 is left open with respect to the outer frame 2. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (17) of the decision key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to re-open the main body frame 4 with the use of the setting key switch 1311a to remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and to close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is operated from the door frame opening switch. It is possible to determine that the determination key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 on the basis of the detection signal of, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “variation (17) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn the decision key ON. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the original position (that is, the setting key switch that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns on the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. Setting switch 1311a by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to OFF and then turning 60 degrees counterclockwise) to return to the setting key switch 1311a. The decision key ON can be turned on, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 may be provided (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as “variation (18) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change substrate 1311 is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a Setting switch 1311a by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and then turning 60 degrees counterclockwise) to return the setting key switch 1311a. The decision key ON can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position and turning off the setting key switch 1311a. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the setting key switch 1311a′). Mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′) may be referred to as “variation (19) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation section. A determination key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation part of the enter key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body so as to prevent the wire or the like from penetrating through the "gap" formed in the opening and the main control board 1310 to be modified. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to each of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused with each other. Is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button with the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover for covering the press operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation part. It is necessary to open the cover.), or the color of the pressing operation portion may be different, and the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. It is possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for the determination key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other). When the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a′ may be used (the mode 2 of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation example (20) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence/absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change capable of changing the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM contained in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. Can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Mode 3 (including the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′) may be referred to as a “variation example (21) of the enter key”). The period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is output from the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f also has a function of an error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the signal of this decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, of the gate 2002 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2601, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, second starting opening sensor 2401, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first big winning opening sensor 2525, second big The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as “modification example (22) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the gate 2002 and various winning holes in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a uses a stepping motor, a DC motor, The drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid is controlled to control the operation of the movable body (feature), and the movement of the movable body (feature) is detected based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (optical type). The aspect of the object sensor (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (23) of the determination key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, and the optical sensor causes the movable sensor (actuator) to move to the original position. It is necessary to move the movable body (feature) so as to detect the operation position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). It was possible to input the signal of this decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, detect an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “variation (24) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. By vibrating the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to various winning openings and gates (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of entering a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. The presence/absence of the decision key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “variation (25) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and further turning counterclockwise 60 degrees). The signal of this decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to play the game. Provided on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 are radio wave sensors that detect misbehavior by illegally acquiring the game ball B by causing various sensors of various winning openings provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not there is any misconduct based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “variation (26) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with a radio wave in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the press operation section 303 of the effect operation section unit 350 is used. The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the touch detection sensor 373 and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (production operation button The mode of the unit (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as “variation (27) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 formed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are caulked by a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 as described above can be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by intruding a wire or the like through "clearances" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the decision key button. In order to prevent this, the wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening. As the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, when the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, An opening/closing switch for setting change substrate cover body that can detect opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be performed. Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is released from the base body can be included in the preset setting value change permission condition described above (setting change board box). May be referred to as a “modification example (28) of the enter key”).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern in which a key ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted, and a setting switch button 1311b The wiring pattern to which the signal from is transmitted is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) in the setting change board 1311 as a wiring arrangement, and the terminal of the connector SMCN (main control Connections to the connector MSCN of the board 1310) are also formed apart from each other, and in the main control board 1310 as well, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). Signal from the setting switch button 1311b), a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the OFF key of the setting key switch 1311a) The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch are also formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other). One of the wiring patterns for transmitting the signal of the decision key ON of 1311a is transmitted through the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the wiring pattern. Therefore, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be separately connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). The other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1311 may be connected to each other. Other connectors provided on the board 1310 may be electrically connected to each other via a harness (the wiring pattern may be referred to as “decision key modification (29)”).

Further, among the modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key described above, a mode in which they are appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (the modification combination mode of the modification example is referred to as “modification key of modification key (30)”. May be stated).

In addition, in the setting value described above, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or the lottery determination whether it is a small hit, in order to make a lottery determination when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time It is possible to change the probability of, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of balls of the game ball B that the player can obtain is increased. Probability (advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as the set values, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player has been set in advance. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of setting values ranging from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player for other pachinko machines is high. In some cases, there is a single preset value that is preset. In other words, like the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of setting values in advance and the game specification that requires setting change is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (advantage) has only a single set value in advance and no setting change is necessary. However, when the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Depends on the game specification, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations are provided according to the game specification. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be commonly used without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which the probability (advantage level) of being advantageous to the player has only a single set value in advance and no setting change is necessary, the probability (advantage level) of the setting value to be advantageous to the player. Since there is no need to use it as, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be dealt with by the design change by the software that assigns the following contents. You can

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area (the area excluding the specific area out of the entire area of the RAM) of the RAM incorporated therein (after clearing the RAM). The pachinko machine 1 can be started up in various ways. It can be used as a set value. In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (feature) controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of the light-emitting body such as the lamp or the LED, the setting value 1 is "all operations (movable body (role)". Object operation, lighting of the light emitter)” is assigned to the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, and the setting value 2 is assigned to the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies “movable object (role) operation” and set. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies “lighting of the light emitter” is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed value of the movable body (feature) (variable moving speed, movement over the entire operation area, other The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "operation of interference check with structure or other movable body (role), operation order with other movable body (role), etc.)" is assigned, and "5" is set as the set value. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter for each port (lighting of the light emitter for each predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, for each output port))" is assigned, and the set value 6 is "6. The actual machine confirming operation pattern 6 designating "no operation" is assigned (the mode of change setting of the actual machine confirming operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variant (1) with common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (role) and the lighting of the light emitting body such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, after the RAM confirmation clear operation. The peripheral control board 1510 which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body which is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of the (feature) and the lighting of the light emitter. The method of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared allows the pachinko machine 1 to be started up after the RAM is cleared, with variations.

Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbols to the demonstration (demonstration performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies “10 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies “15 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is “20 seconds”. , A time setting pattern 3 designating “25 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 designating “30 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 5, The time setting pattern 6 designating "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of change setting of the time from the end of the variation of the symbol until the player is in the waiting state is referred to as "a modification example of the common hardware configuration (2 )” may be described). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the time from the end of the variation of the symbols to the waiting state for the player, it is possible to give variations to the time from the end of the variation of the symbols to the demonstration.

Further, for example, it is possible to use as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the variation of the symbols. In this case, a demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies “comical effect” as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)” as the setting value 2 2 is assigned, a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies “serious effect” as the setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (role)” as the setting value 4 4 is assigned, a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies “period play style production” as the setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies “period play style production, movable body (role)” as the setting value 6 The pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the contents of the demonstration effect may be referred to as “variant (3) with common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of change setting of the contents of the demonstration effect, it is possible to give variations to the contents of the demonstration effect performed after the end of the variation of the symbols.

Further, for example, it is possible to use a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 designating "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 designating "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. , A volume setting pattern 3 designating “volume 4” is assigned as a setting value 4, a volume setting pattern 5 designating “volume 5” is assigned as a setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 designating “volume 6” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of default volume change setting may be described as “variant (4) with common hardware configuration”). The volume is set to increase from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6. In the peripheral control board 1510 which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, the default volume is set with the volume (volume setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Also, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved to the direction in which the volume adjustment switch decreases the volume (in the direction opposite to the direction to increase the volume), and the movement to the minimum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the sound is stopped in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the setting value 6 is moved to the end of the maximum volume side by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of increasing the volume (moving in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume or may be a volume of a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This default volume change setting mode allows the default volume adjusted by the volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to have variations.

Further, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sound in error notification of various defects, spots, errors, and the like. The various error notification sounds are those that cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, those that are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound when the volume is set to the maximum volume is used as a game hall. Although a clerk such as a store clerk can easily notice it, the player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification sound volume setting pattern 3 that specifies “error notification sound volume 3” as the setting value 3, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 4 that specifies “volume 4” as the setting value 4, and the setting value 5 “ The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies “error notification volume 5” is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies “error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)” is assigned as the setting value 6 (volume of error notification sound In some cases, the aspect of the change setting of (1) is referred to as “modification example (5) by common hardware configuration”). It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute, and the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward the sound volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if it is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control to emit the error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification sound volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitter that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies “brightness 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies “brightness 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is “ A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies “brightness 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the default brightness setting may be referred to as “variant (6) with common hardware configuration”). is there). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a becomes a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light-emitting body in which the light-emitting body is turned on, to turn on the light-emitting body, blink the light-emitting body, and perform gradation points. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the contents of the default brightness, it is possible to give variations to the default brightness of the light emitters such as the lamp and the LED.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of luminances of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various troubles, spots, and errors. The error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is set as the setting value 2. The error notification brightness setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 to specify “error notification brightness 3” as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness to specify “error notification brightness 4” as the setting value 4 The brightness notification pattern 4 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies “error notification brightness 5” as the setting value 5 is allocated, and the error notification brightness that specifies “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” as the setting value 6 The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be referred to as “variant (7) with common hardware configuration”). It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low but the lamp brightness is low and the brightness of the lamp can be recognized as an error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) toward the setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification by the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. To do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the illuminant that is turned on, to turn the illuminator on, blink, and gradation points. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, the various set values assigned to the modified examples (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration described above satisfy the preset set value display permission condition in the set value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Although it is displayed on the setting display 1310g at this time, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to the power-off (setting value display). May be referred to as a “modified example (8) with a common hardware configuration”).

Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification example (30) of the determination key described above.

In addition, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after the power is restored (a momentary power failure occurs momentarily). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MPU 1310a to specify a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM in main control side power-on processing. The game is progressed by clearing except for, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the preset set value change permission condition described above is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 returns to power, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, to execute the setting change of the main control internal RAM. The game is advanced by clearing all areas except a specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed, when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, the predetermined set value change permission condition described above is satisfied. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing, which will be described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission or the like. It will be. Therefore, as a predetermined setting value change permission condition described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (in some cases, it may be referred to as a “variation of a predetermined set value change permission condition”). is there).

In addition, the above-described predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, the setting key must be turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value that is set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It is displayed on the vessel 1310g. In addition, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed by the pressing operation unit when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the pressing operation period is limited. Therefore, as the preset set value display permission condition described above, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, or the power is restored after the power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (in the case of describing "a modification of the preset set value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, and the main control side power supply described later. In the process at the time of throwing in, it is performed before the initial setting and the startup setting of the built-in WDT, and then the game is advanced by performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modification of the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. Without performing, the detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key ON signal are not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame to detect the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the preset value display permission condition is modified and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the modification of the preset setting change permission condition described above and the modification of the preset setting display permission condition described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a momentary blackout), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the assumption that the key key is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and then the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation. In some cases, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, to clear all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area, and then performs interrupt permission setting and the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and thereafter, The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process once when the progress of the game is started. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of balls of the played game ball B is counted, and is output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 is monitored by the base monitor 1310h. To display. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-described base monitor 1310h (may be referred to as "variation of usage method of base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that has been set during the period from the power recovery to the start of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. It is possible to display the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after power recovery. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, and the modification of the base monitor usage method described above is appropriately used. You may select and may employ|adopt in the modification (30) of the above-mentioned determination key.

In addition, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-described modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-described modification of the base monitor using method is appropriately used. You may select and may be employ|adopted by the modifications (1)-(8) by the common hardware structure mentioned above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game situation), a regular symbol lottery result, a special symbol lottery result, and the like. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying a game status and a lottery result of an ordinary symbol which is selected by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal reservation display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2002.

In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been lottered by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004, and the first start. A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth 2004, and a second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. Second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result, and a second special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005 And are equipped with.

Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is “win” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007. A round indicator including five LEDs for displaying (number of rounds) is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 160).

The peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 that attaches the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 and the set plate 1650. The effect display device 1600, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front surface of the set plate 1650 that is detachably attached to the rear surface of the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010 (FIGS. 151 to 153). See). The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 while the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and is attached in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and part of the rear end projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game balls B driven into the game area 5a and are always open. The gate 2002 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and the variable winning opening 2003 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. And, a first starting port 2004 and a second starting port 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open so as to receive the game ball B, and the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The first big winning opening 2006 and the first big winning which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to According to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting mouth 2004 or the second starting mouth 2005. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2007 that allows the game ball B to be accepted.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, which are respectively provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B. ..

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part in the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the vertical center in the vicinity of the left end in front view in the game area 5a. The variable winning port 2003 is arranged at the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting port 2004 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the bottom end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged above the first starting port 2004 on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first special winning opening 2006 is arranged directly above the variable winning opening 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a. The second special winning opening 2007 is arranged closer to the right end of the game basin 5a, slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a.

The first sub-outlet 2021 is arranged between the second special winning opening 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged on the right side of the second starting port 2005.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2004, and the starting opening unit 2100 is viewed from the front left. Side unit 2200 provided along one of the inner rails 1002 and having four general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above on the left side of the side unit 2200 in front view. , A lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a and having a second starting opening 2005 and a second sub-out opening 2022. ing.

The front unit 2000 is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view within the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003, the first A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a special winning opening 2006, a second special winning opening 2007, and a first sub-out opening 2021, and to the left of the center winning 2500 near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. A gate member 2600 that is provided and has a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 that is provided at the right portion in the game area 5a and that includes a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided.

The lower right unit 2400, which will be described in detail later, is capable of accepting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007, and has a pseudo special winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning opening 2007, and a pseudo. The game ball B not received in the special winning opening 2402 is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a pseudo-out opening 2404 is provided.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The start-up unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a, right above the out-port 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the first starting opening 2004 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and then opens upward, so that the center accessory 2500 can be moved in the left-right direction. Located just below the center. More specifically, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located immediately below the central discharge part 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is accepted by the first starting opening 2004 with a high probability.

The starting opening unit 2100, while attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and transfers it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. You can The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with four general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can always be received. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning openings 2001 is open upward.

The side unit 2200 has four general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward.

The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role object 2500 to the right side below the center role object 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a at the lower right corner of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. The lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2005, a second sub-out opening 2022, and a second starting opening sensor 2401 (see FIG. 149 and the like) for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2005. , Are provided.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo special winning opening 2402 that extends left and right over the entire width in the left-right direction, and a pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. It has a pseudo outlet 2404 provided below the left end of the pseudo special winning opening 2402. The pseudo big winning opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 are open toward the front. The pseudo special winning opening 2402 is larger (wider) on the left and right than the second special winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the normally used special winning opening.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo special winning opening door 2405 that opens and closes the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and a pseudo special winning opening solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 (see FIG. 149 and the like). ), and are provided. The pseudo special winning opening door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a lower side rotatably supported about an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is arranged right above the pseudo out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo special winning port 2402, and the second sub-out port 2022 is on the right side of the second starting port 2005. Adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and the left-right direction is almost the right lower rail 1004. The length is formed so as to cover the upper side.

The lower right unit 2400 forms a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a and a flat plate base plate 2407 that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 and projects forward from the base plate 2407. A possible partition 2410. The base plate 2407 and the partition part 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second starting opening 2005, the second sub-out opening 2022, the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and the pseudo out winning opening 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 is provided on the base plate 2407. It is provided on the rear side. Inside the partition 2410, a pseudo special winning opening 2402 and a pseudo out opening 2404 are provided.

The partition part 2410 extends to the left and right over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end side is higher, and the first standing wall part 2412 extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall part 2411. A right slanted wall portion 2413 that obliquely extends from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412 to the lower left, and a right lateral wall portion 2414 that horizontally extends from the lower end of the right slanted wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412, The second standing wall portion 2415, which is separated from the right lateral wall portion 2414 to the left and extends above the first standing wall portion 2412 from a portion at the same height as the lower end of the right lateral wall portion 2414, and the second standing wall portion 2415 The left sloping wall portion 2416 extending obliquely to the lower right from a portion having the same height as the upper end of the one standing wall portion 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall portion 2415, and the second sloping portion from the lower end of the left sloping wall portion 2416 A left lateral wall portion 2417 that horizontally extends to the left of the standing wall portion 2415, and an inclined wall portion 2418 that obliquely extends to the lower left from the left end of the left lateral wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411. The third standing wall portion 2419 extends downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length that is approximately one gaming ball B shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction. The distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length of the second special winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction. The distance between the lower end of the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left slanted wall portion 2416 is about half the length of the second special winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged in the left lateral wall part 2417 between the second standing wall part 2415 and the inclined wall part 2418. The pseudo special winning opening 2402 is arranged immediately below the right lateral wall portion 2414, the left lateral wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and a portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is obliquely cut out with respect to a horizontally long rectangle. The shape opens to the front. The pseudo out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to a portion where the bottom wall portion 2411 and the third standing wall portion 2419 intersect with each other.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a flat lower right decoration portion 2431 that closes the front end side of a triangular frame formed by the first standing wall portion 2412, the right slanted wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414. And the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second standing wall portion 2415, the left sloping wall portion 2416, and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is closed, and the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are forwarded. It is provided in the center between the extending right and left lower decorative portion 2432 and the lower right right decorative portion 2431 and the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and extends downward from the base plate 2407 in a downward arrow shape. And a lower right middle decoration portion 2433 that projects (see FIG. 137 and the like).

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and the pseudo special winning opening 2402, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 are independently provided. Further, a lower right decoration board 2434 having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting and decorating light is mounted on the front surface.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 has a translucent decorative seal on the front surface of each of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405, the lower right decorative portion 2431, the lower right decorative portion 2432, and the lower middle decorative portion 2433. Is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner in the game area 5a in a state in which the game ball B cannot flow on the right side and the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front around the upper part of each of the right sloping wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left sloping wall portion 2416, and a plurality of obstacles are present at the relevant portion. Nail N is planted. Further, the portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second special winning opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500. Then, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inside of the partition portion 2410 is the game. It is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the area 5a.

Further, in the lower right unit 2400 assembled in the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right of the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418. The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004. Even above the second starting opening 2005, the second sub-out opening 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in that portion. It is set up.

Furthermore, the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, and the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 to the upper right by about one gaming ball B. Further, the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent base plate 2407 and the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Further, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo special winning opening 2402 and a pseudo out opening 2404 inside the partition 2410 (pseudo game area 2010). Inside the partition portion 2410, only the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 is formed to flow.

In the lower right unit 2400, in a normal state, the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is upright, and the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 closes the pseudo special winning opening 2402 so that the game ball B cannot be received. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partition 2410 (pseudo game area 2010) passes through the front of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and the bottom wall portion 2411. After flowing down and rolling to the left along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411, further rolling to the left is prevented by the third standing wall portion 2419, and the portion is opened forward at the relevant portion. It is received in the simulated outlet 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is not returned into the game area 5a but is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008. It is possible to make the player illusion that the game ball B that has rolled to the side and received in the pseudo outlet 2404 rolls on the lower right rail 1004 and is received in the outlet 1008.

The pseudo special winning opening door 2405 which closes the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the first special symbol selected by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. (2) When the pseudo special winning opening solenoid 2406 is energized in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol, the upper end is rotated so that the upper end moves forward around the lower side, and the upper end is positioned slightly above the lower end. And the rear side is lowered, the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) is in a state of protruding forward. In this state, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can receive the game ball B. Then, when the game ball B flows down in front of the pseudo special winning port 2402 while the pseudo special winning port 2402 is in a state of being able to receive the game ball B, it hits the pseudo special winning port door 2405 protruding forward. They come into contact with each other and are guided rearward by the inclination of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 to be received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402.

The pseudo special winning opening 2402 is not received by the second special winning opening 2007 and extends to the left even to a portion below the right discharging passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500, so When the game ball B is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 while the special winning opening 2402 (pseudo special winning opening door 2405) is opened and closed, the game ball B is also received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. It can give the illusion of being a player.

Further, since it also extends to the left in the portion immediately below the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022, it is received in the second special winning opening 2007 when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened and closed. Instead, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the center role object 2500 and received in the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022 is received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. It can be an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 can be viewed from the player side even through the open pseudo special winning opening 2402. By visually recognizing the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403, the player can be illusion that the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is a real special winning opening.

This pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and for opening and closing the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 by counting the number of the game balls B. .. By opening and closing the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 depending on the number of the game balls B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, it is possible to make the pseudo special winning opening 2402 more illusion as if it were a real special winning opening. it can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has the pseudo special winning opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of the commonly used special winning opening of 135 mm and extends to the left and right, it is a conventional pachinko machine. If you have a big winning hole that you have never seen before, you can give the illusion to the player, have a strong impact on the player, and as a pachinko machine to play for the player This pachinko machine 1 can be made easy to be positively selected, and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Further, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right and left sides of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 are located above the pseudo big winning opening 2402 in which the left-right direction is larger than the second special winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction. And the inclined wall portion 2418 is provided, and between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the left slanted wall portion) that are separated by a distance of about half in the left-right direction of the second special winning opening 2007. 2416)) and the game ball B is received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. As a result, the plurality of game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and thus the game accepted in the second special winning opening 2007. It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B than the balls B are received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, which can entertain the player greatly and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 150 and the like. FIG. 148(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstacle nail, and FIG. 148(b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 149(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148 as seen from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 148 in which only the center right front plate is disassembled when viewed from behind and viewed from the front.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly in the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. ..

The center accessory 2500 will be described in detail later, but a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes so that the game ball B can be received according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the first start. The first big prize that opens and closes the game ball B to be acceptable according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth 2004 or the second starting port 2005 The mouth 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 are provided.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like shape protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is inserted in the panel plate 1110. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

The thicknesses of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 are formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not project, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end side projecting from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front surface shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. This support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect of reinforcement while exhibiting the effect. I try not to stand out.

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at a position on the left side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be discharged and the game ball B discharged from the warp exit 2512 and the warp exit 2512 that is opened in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 are left and right. It is provided with a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from bouncing from the outside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B bouncing on the stage 2513 back to the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the position corresponding to immediately above the first start opening 2004 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) such that the position of the center in the left-right direction when mounted on the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2513a) and a lowest portion on both left and right sides (side emission portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the height center portion (center emission portion 2513a) of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting opening 2004 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8e-1. First attacker section]
The center accessory 2500 includes a first attacker unit 2520 having a variable winning port 2003 and a first special winning port 2006 above the warp inlet 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall unit 2501. The first attacker unit 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is in accordance with the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens and closes the variable winning opening 2003, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002. A variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160 and the like) that is energized to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003,

In addition, the first attacker unit 2520 receives the game ball B to the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005, and the first win opening door 2523 that opens and closes the first prize opening 2006. According to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol which are lottered by, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 160 etc.) is energized to open and close the first big winning opening door 2523. , A first special winning opening sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2006.

Further, the first attacker unit 2520 includes a variable winning port 2003, a first special winning port 2006, and a transparent plate-shaped center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the left second guide passage 2532. 137 etc.).

In the center accessory 2500, a first attacker portion 2520 is provided above the warp inlet 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker unit 2520 has a variable winning port 2003 and a first special winning port 2006.

The variable winning port 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, and is in front of the flange portion 2502 extending outward on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and in the vicinity of substantially the vertical center of the center role object 2500. It opens to the left. Further, the first special winning opening 2006 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B just above the variable winning opening 2003.

The variable winning a prize door 2521 is supported rotatably around an axis whose lower end side extends in the front-rear direction, and in the upright state (normal state), the variable winning a prize port 2003 can receive the game ball B. Can be closed. When the variable winning opening door 2521 is energized by the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the gaming ball B can receive the variable winning opening 2003 (open state). ) Can be. When the variable winning opening door 2521 is in the open state, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side and is inclined so as to be lower rightward, so that the game ball B flowing down from above and contacting the upper surface is rightward. It is possible to guide the user to the variable winning port 2003.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, then passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward. To be done.

The first special winning opening door 2523 has a flat plate shape that is inclined so as to be lowered to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In a normal state, the first special winning opening door 2523 projects forward from the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B cannot be received in the first special winning opening 2006. In this state, the game ball B flowing down above the first special winning opening door 2523 is guided to the left by the inclination of the first special winning opening door 2523, and flows through the left second guide passage 2532. ..

When the first special winning opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first special winning opening door 2523 retracts rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B is moved to the first special winning opening 2006. It can be in an acceptable state. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2006 in this state flows down in front of the flange portion 2502, and is provided at a portion between the first big winning opening 2006 and the variable winning opening 2003. After being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2525, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 immediately above the variable winning opening 2003. After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is provided with a left guide passage group 2530 including a plurality of (two here) passages through which the game balls B can flow. There is. In other words, between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002, the left guide passage group 2530 including a plurality of passages (two here) in which the game ball B can flow is provided. Therefore, when the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so as to flow, the game ball B is formed so as to pass through the left guide passage group 2530 without fail.

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided below the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and leftward when assembled to the game board 5 and at a position about 2/3 from the bottom with respect to the game area 5a. ing. The left guide passage group 2530 is approximately three times as high as the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the circulating game ball B can be visually recognized in a good state.

The left guide passage group 2530 includes a left first guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531. The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are separated by a passage wall 2533 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502.

A first special winning opening 2006 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. Therefore, when it is desired to receive the game ball B in the first big winning opening 2006, it is necessary to perform the driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a right guide passage group 2540 which is provided in the upper right corner and includes a plurality (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can flow. This center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end of the right guide passage group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the collision of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is almost in contact with the right rail 1005) near the stop 1006 and is driven into the right above the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the right guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 has a vertical length of about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 can visually recognize the circulating game ball B in a good state.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right first guide passage 2541 and the right first guide passage 2541 which are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. And the right second guide passage 2542 which is open. The inlet of the right first guide passage 2541 and the inlet of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated left and right.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion immediately below the entrance, and then extends downward, and then from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position on the left side with respect to a position immediately below the entrance. Also, after extending forward, the exit opens diagonally to the lower right. In addition, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and is aligned with the right side of the outlet of the right first guide passage 2541, and the outlet is opened obliquely downward to the right. doing. That is, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the right and left intersect.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the right first guide passage 2541 has the right end of its entrance located immediately below the lower end of the stopping portion 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stopping portion 1006 are the right first. It is formed so as to enter the one guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is discharged to the side close to the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged to the side close to the right rail 1005 and enters the second guiding area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. As will be described later in detail, since the game ball B that has entered the second guiding area 2712 is more likely to be received in the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, the right second guide passage 2542 is provided. When the game ball B is entered, it is more likely to be received in the first sub-out port 2021 than when it is entered into the right first guide passage 2541.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a circulation detection sensor 2543 capable of detecting the game ball B circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, when the number of detected game balls B by the distribution detection sensor 2543 is equal to or less than a predetermined number per hour in a game situation in which the player performs “right hit”, the game situation can be more enjoyed. In order to do so, it is possible to prompt a “right hit” or to give an instruction of a driving strength for avoiding acceptance into the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. Becomes

[5-8e-4. Space formation part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (FIG. 147, etc.). See). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height which is about half the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker unit 2560 has a second special winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided in the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500.

In the space forming portion 2550, a flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502 and a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 below the space forming portion 2550 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a guide wall portion 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening portion 2553 penetrating the flange portion 2502 back and forth at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a cutout portion 2551a penetrating left and right in the vicinity of the upper portion. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 such that a space in the left-right direction that is approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed.

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550. The side of the opening 2553 close to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2552 is a constant distance from the peripheral wall 2501, and the side closer to the right wall 2551 is further away from the right wall 2551 as it goes downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550, a side of the flange portion 2502 near the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 to the right with a constant width, and the flange portion 2502. The side closer to the right wall portion 2551 extends vertically so as to widen to the left as it goes downward.

When the opening 2553 is assembled to the game board 5, a part of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inserted from the rear side. The plurality of obstacle nails N inserted into the openings 2553 are a group of specific obstacle nails 2700 that are implanted in a specific gauge arrangement, which will be described in detail later. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

In addition, the space forming portion 2550 has a plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend to the left and right, and are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The rear ridge portion 2554 is provided at a position corresponding to a plurality of front ridge portions 2555d of a center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, and the front and rear directions are staggered. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flown while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 is a transparent flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2555 that covers a space between the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and the translucency attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. And a center right front plate seal 2556 having (see FIG. 149 and the like). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a that penetrate the front and rear and respectively accommodate the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N (braid nail portions 2701), and penetrate the front and rear to form one obstacle. The second accommodating portion 2555b for accommodating the head of the nail N, the peeling hole 2555c penetrating forward and backward at the portion to which the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and the rearward bulging and leftward and rightward extension. And a plurality of front ridge portions 2555d provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center accessory 2500 unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in the shape of a long hole that forms a constant gap with respect to the circumferential line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N (braided nail portions 2701) that are accommodated. Has been. In the present embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed in a size that accommodates the heads of two obstacle nails N, and the center of the first accommodating portion 2555a is different from the center of the obstacle nail N. It is eccentric. The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at positions that correspond to respective obstacle nails N of a specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later.

In addition, as a gap between the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, it is within a range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and further, 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to be within the range of. If the gap is smaller than this range, when the center right front plate 2555 expands or contracts due to changes in the environment, the obstacle nail N may be affected and the obstacle nail N may be bent, and at the time of assembling to the game board 5, the first accommodation This is because it is difficult to store the front end of the obstacle nail N in the portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b and it takes time, which may increase the cost. Further, if the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending when the obstacle nail N is bent due to the impact of the contact of the game ball B or the like exceeds the allowable range, and it is difficult to distribute the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk that

This makes it possible to limit the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N housed in the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b, so that the impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external shock or the like due to something, and to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow and to specify it. The game ball B can be circulated in the obstacle nail group 2700 in a stable state, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be continuously exhibited, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700. You can entertain and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

Further, when assembled on the game board 5, the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555 closes the front sides of the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b. The obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b is bent through the center right front plate seal 2556, the trace thereof remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, The defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

The peeling hole 2555c is a state in which the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is inserted from the rear side by the rod-shaped member. By pressing forward, part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555. Then, the operator pulls the rolled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556 so that the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled) from the center right front plate 2555. This can improve workability such as reattachment work of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing or sorting work at the time of disposal.

The peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of a triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closing wall portion 2566 when assembled on the game board 5, so that the peeling hole is formed. Through the 2555c, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or a portion where the game ball B is distributed, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. ..

Further, the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by the center right front plate seal 2556 being attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c, and to provide the player with On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the existence of the peeling hole 2555c to be noticed, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of front ridge portions 2555d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 that bulge from the flange portion 2502. These front ridge portions 2555d are provided so as to be staggered in the vertical direction with respect to the rear ridge portions 2554. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flown while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second attacker section]
The second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500 includes a second special winning opening 2007 that is long and open upward in the left-right direction, and a first sub-out opening 2021 provided on the right side of the second special winning opening 2007. And have. The second big winning opening 2007, the right end is located at a site slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end is the entire width within the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right. The second special winning opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right side wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall portion 2551 of the space forming portion 2550.

In addition, the second attacker unit 2560 can open and close the second special winning opening 2007 by moving forward and backward with a second special winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007. It is drawn by the second big winning opening door 2562 in the form of a flat plate which is closed at the bottom and is inclined to the left and the game ball B is received at the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It has a second big winning opening solenoid 2563 which is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the second big winning opening door 2562.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 and above the second special winning opening door 2562, and the attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow to the left, and the second large winning opening 2007. The right discharge passage 2565 that extends downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 on the left side and is capable of discharging the game ball B downward, and the front wall of the attacker passage 2564 that protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502. A closing wall portion 2566 that forms a part and extends leftward from the lower end of the guiding wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501.

The attacker passage 2564 extends so as to be lowered to the left at a height slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and the ceiling wall is constituted by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the closing wall portion 2566. At the same time, the wall of the floor is constituted by the second special winning opening door 2562. In this attacker passage 2564, a plurality of rear ridge portions 2564a are formed at the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502, which bulge forward and extend in the up-down direction, and are provided at intervals in the left-right direction. , A center right lower front plate 2572, which will be described later, is bulged rearward and extends in the vertical direction at a portion of the attacker passage 2564, and is spaced in the left-right direction so as to be staggered with the plurality of rear ridge portions 2564a. And a plurality of ridges (not shown) in front of the ridges are provided. By the plurality of front ridge portions and rear ridge portions 2564a, the game ball B can be circulated in the attacker passage 2564 to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction, and the circulation speed can be suppressed.

The right discharge passage 2565 vertically extends downward with a left and right width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 is provided at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the right discharge passage 2565, the right wall is formed by the attacker left wall portion 2568, and the left wall is formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 projects to the front from the flange portion 2502 to the right of the second special winning opening door 2562, is higher than the right end of the second special winning opening door 2562, and is slightly higher than the right end of the closing wall portion 2566. A position that is lower than the left end of the second special winning opening door 2562 that protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502 on the left side of the attacker right wall portion 2567 that extends downward from the lower position and the second special winning opening door 2562. From the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 to the left from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the right shelf portion 2569 and the right shelf portion 2569 in the left-right direction. It is provided at the center between the left shelf 2570 and the left shelf 2570 and the right shelf 2569 and the left shelf 2570 extending downward from the vicinity of the upper end of the attacker left wall 2568 so as to form a gap. And an inner wall portion 2571 which is present.

The second big winning opening 2007 is defined by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the left-right direction. That is, the width in the left-right direction between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the width in the left-right direction of the second special winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the second special winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent short to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 so that the game ball B cannot come and go to the left and right sides. There is. The lower ends of the right shelf 2569 and the left shelf 2570 are located above the lower end of the attacker left wall 2568. A second special winning opening sensor 2561 is provided between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571 and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, respectively. The middle wall portion 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decoration portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5.

The second attacker portion 2560 is located in front of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the space formed by the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570. It further has a transparent lower flat center right front plate 2572 which is closed (see FIG. 137 and the like).

In the normal state, the second attacker portion 2560 has a front end of the second special winning opening door 2562 that projects further forward than the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and cannot receive the game ball B with respect to the second special winning opening 2007. Closed to. The second special winning opening door 2562 that closes the second special winning opening 2007 so as to be openable and closable is formed in a flat plate shape that extends left and right and front and rear, and is hard to see when viewed from the front. , The open/closed state is difficult to understand.

In this normal state, the game ball B that has been driven into the right side of the center role object 2500 and has flowed down the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) is the guiding wall portion 2552 and the right wall. It will flow down from the portion 2551 to the second attacker portion 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B flowing down along the right wall portion 2551 is accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B, which is not received in the first sub-outlet 2021 and flows down onto the second special winning opening door 2562, meanders in the front-rear direction by a plurality of front ridge portions and rear ridge portions 2564a while inside the attacker passage 2564. After rolling to the left, it enters the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second special winning opening door 2562, and is returned from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565 into the game area 5a.

The second attacker portion 2560 of this center accessory 2500 is located immediately above the lower right unit 2400 in the state assembled to the game board 5, and is the left attacker wall that constitutes the right side wall of the right discharge passage 2565. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 approaches the lower end of the portion 2568. As a result, the game ball B is prevented from moving back and forth between the right discharge passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415. That is, a region (pseudo game region 2010) that cannot enter from the right discharge passage 2565 and the game region 5a is formed on the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, a pseudo game area partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569 and the left shelf portion 2570 of the second attacker portion 2560. 2010 is formed. In the pseudo game area 2010, only the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 can be distributed.

Then, in accordance with the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that are drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, to the second special winning opening solenoid 2563. When energized, the second special winning opening door 2562 is retracted, and the second special winning opening 2007 is ready to receive the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B flowing through the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming portion 2550 to the second special winning opening 2007 are accepted into the second special winning opening 2007.

The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf part 2569 or the left shelf part 2570 and is then detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561 to be discharged into the pseudo game area 2010 below. Will be done. In this second attacker unit 2560, since the two second special winning opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if a large number of game balls B are received in the second special winning opening 2007 in a short time, they will be delayed. Can be detected without.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 accommodates the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N of the combined nail portions 2701 that form the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Since the obstacle nail N can be restricted from moving, the obstacle nail N is deformed due to the impact of the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or the impact from the outside. (Bending) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the operation effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be obtained. Can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, the second special winning opening door 2562, which opens and closes the second special winning opening 2007, has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, and also has the second large opening. Since the second prize hole 2007 is opened and closed by moving the prize hole door 2562 forward and backward, the second prize hole door 2562 can be made difficult to see when seen from the front. The presence of the special winning opening 2007 can be made difficult to notice. As a result, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 (pseudo special winning opening door 2405) provided below the second special winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest is increased to the pseudo special winning opening 2402. Can be strongly attracted to, and it can be strongly illusion that the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is a real big winning opening. Therefore, if you have a big winning hole that you have never seen on a pachinko machine so far, you can give the player the illusion of a strong impact, and at the same time give the player a strong impact. This pachinko machine 1 can be positively selected as a pachinko machine to be played easily, and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to the center accessory 2500, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B contacts the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be released from the injection molding die without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is shortly projected from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative object of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, since there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as large as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Are provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role object 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role object 2500 is better compared to the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position slightly below the center skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and below the variable winning port 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Immediately above the gate member 2600, the outlet of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. In addition, a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens to the left at the lower right of the gate member 2600.

The gate member 2600 has a gate 2002 in which a regular symbol lottery for opening and closing the variable winning port 2003 by the passage of the game ball B is performed, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. Have In the present embodiment, the gate 2002 is a detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601.

[5-8 g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 147 and the like. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a and on the upstream side of the second special winning opening 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of combined nail portions 2701 in which a plurality of adjacently arranged obstacle nails N are one set, and the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 are mutually one game ball. It is arranged with an interval allowing passage of B. In the present embodiment, the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided such that the portions (gap portions) between the plurality of braid nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B can be guided by the section 2701. As a result, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guide area 2710 that can guide the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guide area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guidance area 2710 is composed of a first guidance area 2711 and a second guidance area 2712 provided on the right side of the first guidance area 2711. The first guide area 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the outlet of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552. The second guide area 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the outlet of the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the right side portion from the center of the guide wall portion 2552.

The first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape such that the center in the vertical direction bulges rightward. More specifically, in the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the plurality of braid nail portions 2701 forming the outside of the arc, a straight line connecting the braid nail portions 2701 near the upper end portion and the lower end portion. On the other hand, the arcs formed by the plurality of braid nail portions 2701 forming the inside of the arc are in contact with each other. That is, the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are formed such that the width in the left-right direction is a distance of two game balls B. Since the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the number of vertically extending portions is small, and the game ball B is easy to meander in the left-right direction.

In addition, the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are located below the two combined nail portions 2701 that are separated from each other in the left and right directions. 2701 is provided on the right side (the side farther from the center of the arc) than the center between the two upper nail portions 2701. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712.

Further, in the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the gaps which are vertically separated from each other in the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 arranged in an arc shape, It is provided so as to be located higher toward the right row. In other words, in the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the two combined nail portions 2701 that are paired in the left-right direction have the right side. The braid part 2701 is arranged so as to be higher. This makes it easy for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

The guiding region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward with a feeling of meandering in the left-right direction by the plurality of assembled nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, compared to the area where the obstacle nail N is implanted in a general arrangement, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed down, and the flow time of the game ball B to a predetermined position ( Arrival time) can be delayed. In addition, by setting two obstacle nails N as one set in the combined nail portion 2701, it is possible to increase the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B, as compared with the case of forming one obstacle nail N, The effect of delaying the fall of the ball B is enhanced.

In the guide region 2710, the plurality of braid nail portions 2701 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction as well, so the guided game ball B moves to the left outer side or the right outer side through the portion of the gap. Sometimes it ends up. That is, the game ball B moves from the first guidance area 2711 to the second guidance area 2712, moves from the second guidance area 2712 to the first guidance area 2711, and moves from the first guidance area 2711 to the left outside. Or, it may move from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552, and between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (the second prize) It will flow down onto the mouth door 2562 or inside the second big winning opening 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 is between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and a plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502. Also, the plurality of front ridge portions 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555 flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or in the second big winning opening 2007). ..

The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 is between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551 and the plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 and the center right front plate provided on the flange portion 2502. A plurality of front ridge portions 2555d provided on 2555 meander in the front-back direction to flow down. Then, it will flow down to the first sub-outlet 2021, or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or in the second big winning opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it will flow through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside, There is a possibility that the sub-out port 2021 will be accepted. That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the probability that the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021 is higher in the right second guide passage 2542 than in the right first guide passage 2541. .. Therefore, the player can perform a driving operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, when the player hits the ball "right", by hitting it strongly, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop 1006. There is no need, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, when the nail portion is constituted by only one obstacle nail N, a pair is formed for the obstacle nail N to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. Other obstacle nails N become obstacle nails N in all directions forming a gap around the obstacle nail N. That is, one obstacle nail N is in charge of forming a gap in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N is bent, the gap is widened in one direction and narrowed in the opposite direction, so that the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the guidance probability of the game ball B by the guidance region 2710. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distribute the game ball B in a stable state. Further, when the obstacle nail N is bent, it is necessary to adjust the obstacle nails N provided in all directions so that the gap has a desired distance, which requires a lot of maintenance. Becomes

On the other hand, when the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of a plurality of obstructed nails N as in the present embodiment, in the braided nail portion 2701, the direction of the obstructive nail N adjacent to a certain obstructed nail N is Since the adjacent obstacle nails N are in charge of forming the gap, the direction in which a certain (one) obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap can be set only in a part of the directions. It is possible to reduce the number of obstacle nails N that form a pair. As a result, even if one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2701 is bent, since there are few areas of the affected gap, it is possible to suppress a change in the guidance probability of the game ball B by the guidance region 2710. Also, when a certain obstacle nail N is bent, it may be adjusted so that the gap with the obstacle nail N in some directions becomes a desired distance, and compared with the case where the gaps in all directions are adjusted, it can be used for maintenance. Such trouble can be reduced.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is accommodated by inserting the head of the obstacle nail N into the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 when assembled on the game board 5. The braided nail portion 2701 composed of the plurality of obstacle nails N is housed in the first housing portion 2555a so that the heads thereof are surrounded.

Thus, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby limiting the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an impact from the outside due to some reason, and the game ball. It is possible to reduce the flow of B in an unintended flow, and it is possible to circulate the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 in a stable state, so that the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be continuously maintained. It can be exhibited, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, so that the obstacle nail N is deformed. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b that house the head of the obstacle nail N are attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached. Since it is closed by, the nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is bent from the front, the trace thereof remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game ball B to one of the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second special winning opening 2007. This function is an important function that influences the payout rate. No nail adjustment is allowed in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the center right front plate 2555 and the center are arranged. Since the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is covered by the right front plate seal 2556, no nail adjustment can be performed.

In addition, in the said embodiment, although the thing which comprised the some nailed part 2701 which formed the specific obstacle nail group 2700 by the two obstacle nails N was shown, it is not limited to this, and it is three. You may comprise by the obstacle nail N above. When the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, a plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a line, or may be arranged in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, and a hexagon. Is also good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is configured by the two regions of the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured by one, or three or more regions.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, the flow velocity of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that, for example, in the second attacker portion 2560 provided downstream, of the first special symbol. According to the lottery result and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"), if the game ball B is opened and closed within a short time so that the game ball B can be received, the game Even if the player tries to hit the game ball B so that the game ball B arrives at the timing when the game ball B can be received in the second prize hole 2007, the game ball B is moved to the second prize hole 2007 at a desired timing by the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It is possible to make it difficult to reach, and the timing of hitting the game ball B can be difficult. As a result, the degree of difficulty can be added to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be motivated and enjoyed for the game, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game ball B in the second special winning opening 2007, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, since the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed by arranging a plurality of obstacle nails N, the configuration is compared with the case where it is made of a synthetic resin member. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress an increase in the cost required for the pachinko machine 1.

[5-8h. Pseudo game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The pseudo game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a and is an area in which only a specific game ball B can be distributed. Specifically, only the game ball B (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) received in the second big winning opening 2007 is the pseudo game area 2010 that can be distributed. This pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is a portion where the front surface of the flat-shaped game panel 1100 having the game area 5a provided in the front is exposed and a plurality of obstacles which are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. Nail N and a pseudo-large prize that can be opened/closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the second lottery result of the second special symbol that are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has a mouth 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 for discharging the game ball B not received by the pseudo special winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo special winning opening 2402 as a receiving opening that can receive the game ball B, and a pseudo out opening 2404 that discharges the game ball B. It has a structure similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the partition section 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacker section 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned by the right shelf portion 2569, the left shelf portion 2570, and the middle wall portion 2571 of the second attacker portion 2560. The right end of the pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned by the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the first standing wall portion 2412 of the partition portion 2410. The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is sectioned by the attacker left wall section 2568 of the second attacker section 2560, the second standing wall section 2415 of the partition section 2410, the left lateral wall section 2417, the inclined wall section 2418, and the third standing wall section 2419. ing. The lower end of the pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410.

In the pseudo game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front between the second attacker portion 2560 and the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at the relevant portion.

The second special winning opening 2007 as a supply source of the game ball B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second special winning opening door 2562. The second special winning opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves back and forth in the front-rear direction, so that the second special winning opening door 2562 is hard to see from the player side. Then, the pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a, and the parts (the partition 2410 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the center accessory 2500) that are partitioned from the game area 5a are transparent. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are formed in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100 while being formed, the dummy game area 2010 for the player is a part of the game area 5a. Can be illusion of.

The pseudo special winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the second special winning opening 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the left and right sizes of the second special winning opening 2007 are 131 mm, and the left and right sizes of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 are 170 mm. Since the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is open toward the front, the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 that can open and close the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is in a state where the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is closed (normal). In the state (1), the face is directed forward, and the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is conspicuous to the player.

From this, when the player looks at the pachinko machine 1, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 becomes more visible than the second special winning opening 2007, and therefore, the pachinko machines that have been used so far have also seen. It is possible to make the player think that it has a large winning opening that does not exist, and to attract the player's interest strongly.

In the normal state of the pseudo game area 2010 of the present embodiment, the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is upright, and the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 makes the pseudo big winning opening 2402 unable to receive the game ball B. It is closed. Further, in a normal state, the second big winning opening 2007 is closed by the second big winning opening door 2562, so the game is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second big winning opening door 2562. The ball B rolls leftward on the second special winning opening door 2562, and is discharged into the game area 5a through the right discharge passage 2565. Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball B does not flow in the pseudo game area 2010.

From the normal state, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc., which is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the second When the special winning opening door 2562 is retracted, the game ball B can be received in the second special winning opening 2007. In this state, when the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second special winning hole sensor 2561 and then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 will flow down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted in the front exposed portion of the game panel 1100. At this time, if the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo special winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes through the front of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405, and reaches the bottom. After flowing down onto the wall portion 2411 and rolling leftward along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411, further rolling to the left is prevented by the third standing wall portion 2419, and at the relevant portion, it is directed forward. The pseudo out port 2404 that is opened is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, it is discharged from the pseudo game area 2010.

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is outpoured 1008 to the player. The illusion of being accepted by. This makes it possible to give the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the pseudo game area 2010, the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be illusion that it is the same as the game in which the game ball B passes the large winning opening in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to disappoint the player because the gaming ball B cannot be received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. On the other hand, since the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, Upon acceptance, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. As a result, since the game ball B is paid out even though the game ball B is not received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, the player can feel as if he/she has gained the game and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

By the way, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo special winning opening door 2405 which is conspicuous from the front opens and closes, so that the player is instantly aware that the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be accepted. It can be done. As a result, a driving operation (so-called “right hit”) of the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be performed so that the game ball B can be received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. Further, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 may be opened/closed as a kind of notice, or the pseudo special winning opening 2402 may be opened/closed as one of the signals for instructing the player to "right hit". This pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be inserted only when the player hits the ball “right”, so that the player can intuitively understand it.

For this reason, for example, before the second special winning opening 2007 is ready to be accepted, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed to allow the player to perform "right hitting". .. As a result, the "right-handed" game ball B can easily reach the second big winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 can be accepted, so that the player can be more entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Then, during the "big hit" game in which the second special winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, if the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is also opened/closed, many game balls B are played through the second big winning opening 2007 in a short time. It can be supplied into the pseudo game area 2010, and many game balls B are distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, so that the player can enjoy the movement and the game of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010. I can do it. At this time, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened and closed, the game ball B is accepted by the large pseudo special winning opening 2402, which can greatly entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Can be made.

In this embodiment, the left-right direction of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is formed to be larger than the second special winning opening 2007, but above the pseudo special winning opening 2402, the right lateral wall portion 2414, the left lateral wall portion 2417, and The inclined wall portion 2418 is provided, and the game ball B passing between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (between the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416) is a pseudo big winning opening. 2402 is accepted. The distance between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is about half the distance in the left-right direction of the second special winning opening 2007. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007 are aggregated in a narrow range and head toward the pseudo special winning opening 2402. Therefore, the game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007. It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B are received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, which can greatly entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

The pseudo special winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game ball B by receiving the game ball B or give a bonus to the player. Therefore, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is an opening/closing pattern that cannot be seen in the conventional winning openings of pachinko machines (for example, 33-7 beats, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beats, 16 beats, BGM or predetermined). The tempo of music, etc.) can be opened and closed to entertain the player.

In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W may be provided in the pseudo game area 2010. The presence of the wind turbine W in the pseudo game area 2010 makes it more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, a center accessory 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer sides and the lower side of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a wind turbine W that rotates by abutting the game ball B.

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a left guide passage group 2530, a gate 2002, and a side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. , A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that the game balls B are collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. Thereby, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be distributed to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. The game ball B flowing through the second left guide passage 2532 will flow downward while approaching the center accessory 2500, and will flow down the left side of the variable winning port 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first special winning opening 2006 which is normally closed unacceptably by the first special winning opening door 2523, and the left second guide passage 2532 is provided. The game ball B that has entered the above rolls on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down. And, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol which are lottered by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the first prize hole door 2523 is provided. When the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while moving backward, there is a high probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the first special winning opening 2006.

The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first special winning hole sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball of the back unit 3000 is guided. It is discharged downward through the unit 3100. When the game balls B are detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2525, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B is given.

The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be collected directly above the gate 2002 at a site below the variable winning port 2003. With this, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B flows downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery for normal symbols is executed. Then, if the lottery result of the lottered ordinary symbols is "ordinary winning", the variable winning a prize port 2003 is in a state of being able to receive the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning port 2003 is in a receivable state, the variable winning port door 2521 is rotated to the left, so that the game ball B flowing through the left second guide passage 2532 has a high probability of variable winning. Accepted by mouth 2003. The game ball B received in the variable winning port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning port sensor 2526, and then passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to be lowered. Is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

A warp entrance 2511 and a wind turbine W are provided from above between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300. The warp inlet 2511 is opened leftward on the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The wind turbine W is arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002 and closer to the center accessory 2500.

As for the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W, the gate 2002 and the game ball B flowing through the right outside of the gate 2002 mainly flow down to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Are arranged to. Therefore, the game ball B flowing through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain probability. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left outside of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is provided near the lower end of the center portion of the center accessory 2500 in the left-right direction from the warp exit 2512 that opens into the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the warp passage. It is supplied to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is discharged from either the central discharge portion 2513a or the side discharge portion 2513b so as to flow back into the game area 5a.

The central emitting portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided right above the first starting opening 2004 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, so that the gaming ball B emitted from the central emitting portion 2513a has a high probability of being the first. Accepted in the start port 2004. The game ball B emitted from the side emission parts 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central emission part 2513a is accepted into the first starting port 2004 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002. Then, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a privilege such as a predetermined special lottery is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guiding section 1003 and then discharged downward.

The game ball B flowing on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W has a high probability of being located on the upper stage side of the plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged in two stages along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down on a plurality of obstacle nails N. The game ball B that has not flowed down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper stage side through the right side of the windmill W flows down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls the shelf 2301 to the right, and then onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. Run down to.

The game ball B, which circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W and flows down to the upper stage side of the plurality of obstacle nails N which are diagonally arranged, has a center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a (below the center accessory 2500). There is a possibility of being guided to the first starting port 2004) side and being accepted by the first starting port 2004. In addition, on the upper stage side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are obliquely arranged in a row, there is a gap through which one game ball B can pass, and therefore may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 will be accepted. The game ball B that has not been received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left part of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower side of the diagonally arranged obstacle nails N is in the left-right direction of the game area 5a by the obstacle nails N. It is guided to the center side, is not received in the first starting port 2004, is received in the out port 1008, and is discharged from within the game area 5a. Since a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided on the lower side, there is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 can be accepted through the gaps.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. It is discharged above and below. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the right guide passage group 2540, the space forming section 2550, the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the second attacker section 2560, and the lower right unit 2400 are sequentially arranged from the top. A specific obstacle nail group 2700 including a plurality of obstacle nails N is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is inserted at a strength such that the game ball B enters above the portion that becomes lower rightward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B, which is relatively strongly struck toward the right side of the center accessory 2500, comes into contact with the stop 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540. On the other hand, the game ball B, which is relatively weakly aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and moves to the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the right second guide passage 2542.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 and then downward from the side close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Is released. Then, the game ball B that has passed through the right first guide passage 2541 enters the first guiding area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and moves leftward and rightward in the first guiding area 2711. It runs down meandering. The game ball B flowing through the first guiding area 2711 contacts the guiding wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guiding wall portion 2552.

The plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the walls on the left and right sides of the first guiding area 2711 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass between each other in the vertical direction. The game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side (second guide region 2712) of the first guide region 2711 through. The game ball B moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 flows down to the guide wall portion 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501. At this time, due to the plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front ridge portions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the ridges meander in the front-rear direction and flow down. The game ball B that has flowed down to the guide wall portion 2552 flows to the lower right diagonally along the guide wall portion 2552. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the first guidance area 2711 will flow through the second guidance area 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged downward from the side close to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and moves left and right in the second guide area 2712. It runs down meandering. The game ball B that has flowed through the second guide area 2712 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

The plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the walls on the left and right sides of the second guide area 2712 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass between each other in the vertical direction. There is a case where the game ball B moves to the outer left side of the second guide area 2712 (first guide area 2711) or the outer right side. The game ball B moved to the left outside from the second guidance area 2712 flows through the first guidance area 2711. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guidance region 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551 and between the guidance wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. Run down to the site. At this time, due to the plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front ridge portions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the ridges meander in the front-rear direction and flow down. The game ball B moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward via the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The game ball B guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a circulation speed of the game ball B suppressed and is at the same height as compared with a site where the obstacle nail N is implanted in a general gauge arrangement. It will be delayed and will flow down.

The game ball B that has flowed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming unit 2550) and was not received in the first sub-out port 2021 is from the guide wall unit 2552 and the attacker right wall unit 2567 to the second attacker unit. It enters into the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second special winning opening 2007 of 2560. In a normal state, since the second special winning opening door 2562 has advanced and closed the second special winning opening 2007 unacceptably, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 is the second big winning opening door 2562. After being rolled to the left on the upper surface of the above, it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. In this attacker passage 2564, the game ball B rolls to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the rear ridge portion 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front ridge portion of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the second attacker portion 2560 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left lateral wall portion 2417). To do. Then, with a certain probability, it is received in the second starting port 2005 which is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565. Further, although the probability is lower than the acceptance probability to the second starting port 2005, it is accepted to the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting opening 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a special special lottery is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The game ball B discharged from the right discharge passage 2565 and not received in either the second starting opening 2005 or the second sub-out opening 2022 rolls diagonally to the lower left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B circulating through the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker unit 2560 is a lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the first special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. When the second special winning opening door 2562 retracts according to the lottery result of the two special symbols, the second special winning opening 2007 is accepted with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 is supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by one of the two second special winning opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game balls B are detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B supplied from the second special winning opening 2007 into the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010. Then, when the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is closed by the pseudo special winning opening door 2405, the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 passes through the front of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 and flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411, and along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411. After rolling to the left, it is received in the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When the game ball B is circulated in the pseudo game area 2010, the lottery result and the second special symbol of the first special symbol selected by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. When the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 in accordance with the lottery result, the contact with the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is highly likely and the pseudo special winning opening door 2402 is received in the rear. To be The game ball B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. A predetermined effect can be executed by detecting the game ball B by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403.

As an effect using the pseudo-winning prize hole 2402, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that have been randomly selected (for example, according to "big hit", "small hit", etc.) When the second special winning opening 2007 is open, the peripheral special control board 1510 opens the pseudo special winning opening 2402 for effect. At this time, the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second special winning opening 2007, and thus the degree to which the pseudo special winning opening 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. By utilizing this property, it can be suggested that when a large number of pseudo special winning openings 2402 pick up the game balls B, they are put into a high-probability state (so-called probability change state) after the “big hit”. On the contrary, when there are a lot of misses in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, it can be suggested that a low-probability state (so-called normal non-certain variation state) occurs after “big hit”. Furthermore, the probability setting (generally, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) can be suggested by such a missing state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a normal state, even if the player hits the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is only a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting opening 2005 to which the privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is opened. Since there is no possibility of passing or being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005. With the lottery result, the special variation time for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol to the player is set longer in the lottery result of the second special symbol than in the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes more time to consume the number of holdings, so that even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 is the same. , The number of the lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting opening 2005 is smaller. Further, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B to be paid out is one. Therefore, in a normal state, even if the player hits the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting opening 2005 is likely to be accepted, and the privilege is accepted even if the second starting opening 2005 is accepted. Since the number of the game balls B paid out as is one, it is possible to make the player easily hit the game balls B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game balls B are received in the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, a privilege to pay out a lot of the game balls B is given. In order to be able to receive the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are made to receive the game ball B, and they are It is necessary to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol that can be accepted be drawn.

From this, also in the normal state, the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the player so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2004. The ball B can be driven, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed by showing the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the first start opening 2004 A sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B can be increased.

Then, by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004, "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes, so that the game ball B is driven so that the game ball B can be received at the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007. It is possible to entertain the operation, and it is possible to increase an expectation for accepting the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007.

Specifically, when the first special winning opening 2006 becomes available, the driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 2007 becomes available, a driving operation (“right hitting”) can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center accessory 2500.

When hitting the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540 including a right first guide passage 2541 and a right second guide passage 2542, and a specific obstacle. A guide area 2710 composed of a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage for circulation facilitates reception in the second sub-out port 2022, and thus a desired guide is provided. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the passage (here, the first guide passage 2541 on the right side), and the player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B. Can be entertaining.

In addition, the second big winning opening 2007 has a larger opening in the left-right direction than the first big winning opening 2006, so that the second big winning opening 2007 is shorter than the first big winning opening 2007. It can be recognized that a large number of game balls B can be accepted. Thereby, when the second winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the player can immediately change the driving operation so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B into the special winning opening 2007 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2007, the game ball B is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 in which the pseudo special winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second special winning opening 2007 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B into the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and to entertain the movement of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be made.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The rear unit 3000 is a general winning opening sensor 3001 which is received in the general winning opening 2001 and detects the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a rear starting portion 2004 is received in the rear of the gaming panel 1100. A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the guided game ball B is provided. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall, and a back wall of the back box 3010. A rear box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back substrate unit 3040 arranged behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 are provided. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower portion near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 in which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows and the front end in the back box 3010. Inside the back box 3010, a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided inside the back box 3010, a back front front effect unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the front front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction. In the back lower front effect unit 3200 provided in the lower rear of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 and in the back box 3010, the back rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300 (FIG. 155)) and a back lower back effect unit 3600 provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box relation]
Next, the configuration related to the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151(a) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 151(b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relation of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 152(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the rear. FIG. 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear case rear unit in FIG. 152 as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 153(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the rear.

The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 opened to the front, a back box rear unit 3030 attached to a rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back box rear unit 3030. And a back substrate unit 3040 attached to the rear side of 3010. The rear case rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear case 3010 by a lock slider 3020.

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape having an open front and a square opening penetrating the back wall, and a back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010a. The mounting surface portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and the mounting surface portion 3010b are provided below the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. The lock slider 3020 includes a lock mechanism portion 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 is attached so as to be slidable left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangle having an aspect ratio of 3:4 in a front view. The opening 3010a is formed so that the left-right direction is substantially the same size as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the vertical center of the back box 3010. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing pieces 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the rear case rear unit 3030 are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the rear case 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear in a state where the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid rightward in the rear view with the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted in the lock mechanism portion 3010d, the lower movement of the lower fixing piece 1652 is blocked by the lock slider 3020. be able to.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface abutting the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the back ball guiding unit 3100 and the like formed at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear surface about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. Is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has a locking portion 3010g with which the locking claw 3041b of the back substrate unit 3040 is locked.

The rear case rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the rear case 3010 from the rear side. The rear box rear unit 3030 is attached to the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the set plate 1650 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached on the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the set plate 1650. And a peripheral control unit 1500 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device having an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in a flat plate shape with a quadrangle having the same size as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 which are separated from the upper side in the left-right direction and which protrude upward, and one lower fixing piece 1652 which protrudes downward from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side. There is. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010.

Further, the set plate 1650 has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 which is open toward the front on the front surface side. The liquid crystal attachment portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and attached from the front. In the present embodiment, when viewed from the front, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 coincide with each other. The set plate 1650 is transparent. Accordingly, the inside of the back box 3010 can be visually recognized from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160 and the like) having a peripheral control section 1511 and an effect display control section 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 housing the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 so that the upper side of the peripheral control board box 1520 is located slightly lower than the upper side of the set plate 1650. Accordingly, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, an area having a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is provided between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. Has been formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a board box 3041 that is L-shaped in a front view and has a thin box shape in the front and rear, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have it. The board box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a that are rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portion 3010f of the back box 3010, on the outer side of the L-shaped vertically extending portion. In addition, the board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the tips of the left and right L-shaped portions.

This back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 across the opening 3010a (back box rear unit 3030). When assembled on the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back substrate unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. Further, the L-shaped portion of the back substrate unit 3040 that extends to the left and right is located between the lower end at the rear of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

The back board unit 3040 releases the locking between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b, and rotates the locking claw 3041b around the shaft portion 3041a so as to move rearward, thereby the back box. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the rear unit 3030 can be attached to and detached from the rear casing 3010 without being removed from the rear casing 3010.

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a having a size capable of mounting a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010, and the setting plate 1650 is attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the 1650. Accordingly, when the effect display device 1600 has a size of 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect is displayed. It can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 via a set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to attach the effect display devices 1600 having different sizes by changing the set plate 1650 without changing the back box 3010. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is also changed according to the change of the model, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common component even if the model is changed. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when it is desired to change the position of the effect display device 1600 due to a design change or the like, it is possible to easily cope with it by changing only the set plate 1650. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost for design change and the like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the transparent set plate 1650 is shown, but the set plate 1650 is not limited to this, and may be colored such as colored transparent or colored opaque. When the set plate 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, it is desirable that the set plate 1650 has an opaque color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the inside of the island facility or seeing the light from the rear, which makes the pachinko machine 1 look unattractive. In this case, in particular, by making the set plate 1650 black, it is possible to make the set plate 1650 inconspicuous even if the set plate 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, so the effect display device in the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to make the 1600 and other ornaments and the like more conspicuous, and it is possible to make it possible to sufficiently exert the effect produced by them.

[5-9b. Back ball guiding unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower portion of the back box 3010 near the front end. The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2004. , And a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting an illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 160 and the like).

The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second big winning opening 2007, a first sub-out opening 2021, and Having a discharge passage for receiving the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guiding it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end and then discharging it downward There is.

[5-9c. Back front edge decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, when assembled to the game board 5, has a back front peripheral decoration 3201 formed in an annular shape along the periphery of the game area 5a and the back front peripheral decoration 3201 for emitting light decoration. And a back-front peripheral decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is formed in a shape simulating a sumo ring. The front back peripheral edge decorative body 3201 is formed to have a light-transmitting property, and can be light-emitted and decorated by light from the LED mounted on the rear front peripheral edge decorative substrate.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the periphery of the game area 5a can be annularly decorated by the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. Further, by illuminating and decorating the back front peripheral decoration body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be made to emit light in a ring shape, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

Further, since the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is capable of independently emitting and decorating a plurality of circumferentially divided parts by a plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral edge decorative substrate, light may rotate in the peripheral direction. The luminous effect can be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9d. Urakami Front Production Unit]
Next, the back-up front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The front back production unit 3300 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in the front-rear direction at substantially the same position as the front peripheral decoration unit 3200. The back-up front rendering unit 3300 is provided in the rear of the back-up front decoration 3310, which is a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and behind the back-up front decoration 3310, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front. An upper front decorative substrate (not shown) and a rear upper front elevating unit (not shown) for elevating the rear upper decorative body 3310 are provided.

The back side front decorative body 3310 is provided so that the sumo rankings such as “Yokozuna”, “Ozeki”, “Sekiwaki” are arranged from the left side, and the respective numbers are assigned by the LEDs on the back side front decorative board. Can be independently illuminated. The back upper front decorative body 3310 is formed to have a length such that the left-right direction traverses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back upper front decorative body 3310 is attached so as to be able to move up and down, and can be raised and lowered by the back upper front elevating unit. The back upper front decorative body 3310 can be raised and lowered within the range of substantially the same height as the height of the back upper front decorative body 3310. In the normal state, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is in a state of being moved up to the highest position. In this state, when assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in a front view, and is located above the game area 5a. Most of the front and rear decorations 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining parts can be seen through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. it can.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal raised position to the lowered position by the back-up front lifting unit. In the lowered position, the back-up front decorative body 3310 has a vertical center located substantially at the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 159). In the state of the lower position, the back front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized almost entirely through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

According to the back-up front production unit 3300, since the numbering of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be independently performed by light emission decoration, for example, after all the numbering is subjected to variable light emission decoration, only one numbering is performed. It is possible to perform a light-emission effect in which the light-emission decoration is performed and the variation stops. As a result, if the high-ranked rankings are illuminated, it is possible to make the player think that an opportunity has come, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, according to the back front decorative body 3310, and according to the ranking of the number of light emission decorations, suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a “big hit” game) will occur. can do. As a result, when a plurality of numbered variable light emission decorations of the back front decorative body 3310 are started, it is possible to make the player feel harassed and pounding depending on whether or not the variation is stopped at the desired numbering. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lower position by the back upper front elevating unit, the back upper front decorative body 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a and the front of the effect display device 1600. Since the upper portion is blocked, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-side front decoration body 3310, and the back-side front decoration body 3310 can be focused. As a result, it is possible to surely show the player the light emission effect using the above-mentioned front and rear decorative body 3310, and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, if the above-described light emitting effect is executed at the lower position than at the ascending position, it is possible to increase the player's premium feeling, and therefore, the reliability of suggesting the degree of expectation by the light emitting effect can be increased. It is possible to further raise the expectation for the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9e. Front and back production unit]
Next, the lower back front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The lower back front effect unit 3400 is provided below the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the lower portion inside the back box 3010. The back under front effect unit Yunito 3400 is a back under front decorative body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, and a back under front decorative board provided behind the back under front decorative body 3410 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (illustration). Is omitted) and a front lower back elevating unit (not shown) for elevating the front lower back decoration 3410.

The front lower back decoration 3410 can be illuminated and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front lower back decoration substrate. In addition, the back lower front decoration 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowermost lowered position and the highest raised position by the back lower front elevating unit. The lower back front decorative body 3410 is formed in such a length that the left-right direction traverses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The lower back front decoration 3410 includes a base decoration 3411 that is long in the left and right, a central decoration 3412 provided at the center of the base decoration 3411 in the left-right direction, and a base decoration 3411 that can cover the center decoration 3412 from the front. A front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414, which are provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 156 and the like).

The base decoration 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape imitating a rope and has a light-transmitting property. The central ornamental body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a relief-like character of "cup". The central ornamental body 3412 is provided rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction centering on the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned so as to be in contact with each other and movably provided so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 each have translucency. The front left decorative body 3413 is formed with a relief pattern of the letters “heaven”. The front right ornamental body 3414 is formed with a relief pattern with the letters "rising".

In a normal state, the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414 are located in a closed position in which they are close to and in contact with each other, and the central decoration body 3412 provided in the rear is hidden from the front invisible. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from the normal state to the open position in which they are separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the open position, the central decoration body 3412 provided on the rear side can be viewed from the front through the space between the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414.

In the normal state, the back lower front effect unit 3400 has the lower back front decorative body 3410 positioned at the lowered position. Further, in a normal state, the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414 are located in the closed position, and the central decoration body 3412 is invisible from the front. In the normal state, the lower back front decorative body 3410 has a vertical center located slightly above the side upper left unit 2300 when assembled on the game board 5, and a lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. And the upper end is located slightly below the warp inlet 2511. In the normal state, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is partially visible through the frame of the center role object 2500, and the rest is a transparent panel panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a transparent center role object 2500. It is visible through.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be moved from the lowered position to the raised position by the lower back front elevating unit. In the state where the lower back front decorative body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is located slightly lower than the upper back front decorative body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 154). In other words, the vertical center of the lower back front decorative body 3410 in the raised position is located at substantially the same height as the first special winning opening 2006. Further, the back lower front decorative body 3410 has the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at an arbitrary position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. Can be moved.

According to this front lower back production unit 3400, when the front lower back decorative body 3410 is moved upward from the lowered position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and at the same time blocks a part of the performance display device 1600. Can be strongly attracted, and the front lower back decoration 3410 can be noticed.

Further, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the back lower front decorative body 3410 makes the central decorative body 3412 provided behind (visible). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good with the appearance of the central ornamental body 3412, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the back lower front decorative body 3410, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position and the central decorative body 3412 is moved. When the central ornamental body 3412 is rotated with the body 3412 appearing, it can be strongly suggested to the player that something good should be done, and the expectation of the player is further enhanced. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the central ornamental body 3412 can be rotated, when the central ornamental body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the central ornamental body 3412 rotates. Can entertain.

In addition, the back lower front effect unit 3400 raises and lowers the front lower decoration 3410, the appearance of the central decoration 3412 by the movement of the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414, and the rotation of the center decoration 3412. By appropriately combining and, it is possible to show a variety of movable effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the back under front effect unit 3400, in addition to the movable effect of the back under front decorative body 3410 as described above, since it is also possible to emit light by a plurality of LEDs of the under back under decorative board, more diverse effects can be achieved. It can be shown to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9f. Back production unit]
Next, the back-up rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided in the upper part inside the back box 3010 and behind the back-up front effect unit 3300. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided behind the back-up rear decoration 3510 (see FIG. 155 and the like) that is long in the left-right direction, and is provided behind the back-up rear decoration 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A rear back decorative board (not shown) and a rear rear elevating unit (not shown) for elevating the rear rear decorative body 3510 are provided.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has a light-transmitting property, and can be illuminated and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate. Further, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the raised position most raised by the back-up rear lifting unit and the lowered position lowered most. Further, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 is formed in a shape imitating the upper half of the winning cup, and a letter “Yu” is formed in a relief shape at the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decorative body 3510 can form one big winning cup by the back-up rear decorative body 3610 contacting the lower end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has substantially the same height as the back-up front decorative body 3310.

In the rear side rear effect unit 3500, the rear side rear decorative body 3510 is located at the raised position in a normal state. In this state, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3310 in the raised position and is invisible from the front.

In the back-up rear effect unit 3500, when the back-up rear decoration 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back-up rear elevating unit, the lower end of the back-up rear decoration 3510 is substantially at the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is located in In the state where the rear upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back-up front decoration 3310 or the back-down front decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back-up rear decoration 3510, the back-up rear decoration 3510 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back-up rear effect unit 3500, it is possible to make the appearance visible from the front by raising and lowering the back-up rear decoration body 3510. Therefore, the player can be surprised by the appearance of the back-up rear decoration body 3510. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the back upper back decorative body 3510 can be brought into contact with the back lower back decorative body 3610 to form one large decoration, a strong impact can be given to the player, and It is possible to suppress the decline in interest that makes you think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-9 g. Back production unit]
Next, the lower back post production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The lower back lower production unit 3600 is provided behind the lower front production unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The under-rear posterior effect unit 3600 is provided behind the under-rear decorative object 3610 (see FIG. 155 and the like) which is long in the left-right direction, and is provided behind the under-rear decorative object 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a rear-bottom rear decoration substrate (not shown) and a rear-bottom rear lift unit (not shown) for moving the rear-bottom rear decoration member 3610 up and down.

The back lower back decorative body 3610 has a light-transmitting property, and can be illuminated and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower back decorative substrate. Further, the under-back rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the most lowered lower position and the most raised position by the lower back rear lifting unit.

The back lower back decorative body 3610 is formed in a shape imitating the lower half of the winning cup, and a letter of “prize” is formed in a relief shape at the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decorative body 3610 can form one big winning cup by the back-up rear decorative body 3510 contacting the upper end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The back lower back decorative body 3610 has substantially the same height as the back lower front decorative body 3410.

In the under-rear posterior effect unit 3600, in a normal state, the under-rear posterior decorative body 3610 is located at the lowered position. In this state, the back lower back decorative body 3610 is located behind the front lower back decorative body 3410 in the lowered position, and is invisible from the front.

In the state where the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the back lower rear elevating unit, the back lower rear decorative unit 3600 has the upper end of the back lower rear decorative body 3610 at the lower end of the rear upper rear decorative body 3510. It is located at a height where it abuts. In the state in which the rear lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the front upper back decoration 3310 or the front lower back decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back lower back decoration 3610, the back lower back decoration 3610 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back under-rear effect production unit 3600, since the back under-rear decoration 3610 can be made visible so as to be visible from the front, the player can be surprised by the appearance of the back under-rear decoration 3610. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the back lower back decorative body 3610 can be brought into contact with the back upper back decorative body 3510 to form one large decoration, a strong impact can be given to the player, and It is possible to suppress the decline in interest that makes you think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159 and the like. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front lower back decorative body of the front lower back production unit and the rear lower back decorative body of the rear back lower production unit in the back unit are respectively moved to the raised positions. .. In FIG. 155, the back under front decorative body of the back under front production unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back over back decorative body of the under back rear production unit is moved over the back under front decorative body. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state in which the back-under-rear decorative body of the back-under-rear effect unit is moving to the lower side of the back-under front decorative body. FIG. 156 shows a state in which, in the state of FIG. 155, the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit are moved to the open position and the central decorative body appears. It is a front view of a game board.

Also, FIG. 157 shows that the back-up rear decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit of the back unit is moved to the lowered position and the back-up rear decorative body of the back-down rear effect unit rises to move the back-up rear decorative body. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where it abuts. FIG. 158 shows a state in which, in the state of FIG. 157, the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit have moved to the open position and the central decorative body has appeared. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 159 shows that the back-up front decorative body of the back-up front rendering unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back-up rear decorative body of the back-up rear rendering unit moves to the rear of the back-up front decorative body. , The front part of the front part of the front part of the back production unit is moving up and moving to the lower side of the front part of the front part of the back part, and the rear decoration part of the rear part of the rear production part is rising and adorn the front part of the back part. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of being in contact with the rear upper rear decorative body behind the body.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. In the back unit 3000 arranged behind 1100, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front decoration body 3310 of the back top front rendering unit 3300, and the back bottom of the back bottom front rendering unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410 and the like can be satisfactorily viewed, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily viewed through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the back-front rim decoration body 3201 of the back-front rim decoration unit 3200 is provided in an annular shape along the rim of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the like. You can The back-up front decorative body 3310 of the back-up front rendering unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the rendering display device 1600, and is located at a raised position where the center in the vertical direction is substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Most of them can be visually recognized through the frame of the center character 2500, and the remaining parts can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center character 2500.

In addition, the front lower back decoration 3410 of the front lower back production unit 3400 is located in the lower position near the lower end of the performance display device 1600, where the vertical center is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300. Part of it can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 are located immediately above the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized in the frame of the center accessory 2500 through a square area between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 of the back-up rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back-up front decoration 3310 and cannot be seen from the front. Further, the back under-rear decoration body 3610 of the back under-rear effect unit 3600 is located behind the front back under-decoration body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 is a back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back front production unit 3300, the back front production unit 3400, the back rear production unit 3500, and the back production unit 3600 perform predetermined movable production and light emission production. In addition, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform a movable effect as shown in FIGS. 154 to 157. First, as shown in FIG. 154, the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front rendering unit 3400 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear rendering unit 3600 are moved together to the raised position. As a result, the under-back front decorative body 3410 that crosses the effect display device 1600 moves upward so as to cross the effect display device 1600 vertically, so that the player's interest is attracted to the under-back front decorative body 3410. You can do something, and you can make you think there is something good.

By the way, in FIG. 154, if only the lower back front decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the lower back rear decorative body 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. Since it is formed to form a pair with the rear decorative body 3510, if only the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can be visually recognized, it looks like a halfway unnatural thing, and the appearance of the game area 5a is deteriorated. There is a fear. In addition, when the underside rear decorative body 3610 is visible, the imperfect shape causes the player to recognize that the decorative body 3610 is to be combined with another decorative body, and is combined with the rear upper and lower decorative body 3510 described later. When the movable effect is executed, the impact on the player is reduced, and there is a possibility that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the back lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the back lower front decorative body 3410, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 may be hidden. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a from being deteriorated, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the back lower rear decorative body 3610, and to move jointly with the back upper rear decorative body 3510 described later. It is possible to fully bring out the effect of the effect.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 155, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the back lower back decorative body 3610 is moved together with the back lower front decorative body 3410 so that the front lower back decorative body 3410 is positioned in front. Further, the back-up rear decoration 3510 is moved to a portion between the back-up front decoration 3310 and the back-down front decoration 3410, and the back-under back decoration 3610 is moved to the lower side of the back-down front decoration 3410. Let

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered with the back-up rear decorative body 3510, the back-lower front decorative body 3410, and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, which has a strong impact on the player. You can give it and make you strongly think that there is something good. In this state, the back upper back decorative body 3510 and the back lower back decorative body 3610 that form one decoration (here, the winning cup) are separated from each other in the vertical direction. Since the front underbody decoration 3410 is located, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the vertically long winning cup is hidden by the front underbody decoration 3410, which makes the player unattractive. Can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position close to each other to the open position separated from each other. Then, the central decoration body 3412 is made to appear visibly between the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414. As a result, when the central decoration 3412 newly appears in the back lower front decoration 3410, an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game state) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can be strongly thought, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state can be increased to suppress the decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 may be gradually moved or repeated opening and closing. Thereby, depending on whether the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are opened and the central decorative body 3412 appears, the player can be excited and excited, and the player can be entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. By this, by rotating the central ornamental body 3412, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game state) occurs, and the advantageous game state is set. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

Subsequently, from the state shown in FIG. 156, as shown in FIG. 155, after moving the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 to the closed position, as shown in FIG. 157. , The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are respectively moved to the center in the vertical direction and brought into contact with (joined with) each other. As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game state) occurs. , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state and suppress a decrease in interest.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 158, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, it is possible to strongly convince the player that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a "big hit" game state) occurs, and the expectation for the advantageous game state is increased to lower the interest. Can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. This allows the player to recognize that the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a “big hit” game state) has been confirmed, and the expectation for the advantageous game state is increased to enhance the interest. Can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the first operation is to move the front lower back decoration 3410 (back lower back decoration 3610) to the raised position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is moved to the lowered position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 together with the back-up front decorative body 3310 is moved to the lower position. The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower side and the back lower front decorative body 3310 is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body 3310, and the back lower front decorative body 3610 is rearward of the back lower front decorative body 3410. It may be moved to. Alternatively, the back lower front decoration 3410 may be moved to the center of the game area 5a together with the back lower rear decoration 3610. With these, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In this way, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above is the lottery of the first special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. It is executed according to the result and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which can entertain the player. In addition, a series of productions, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that have been drawn, proceed to the end or end halfway, and so on, in multiple stages By showing it, it is difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above can be appropriately combined with the light emission effect, and is also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and also to provide the player with various effects. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above is obtained by drawing the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005 or the first special symbol. Although the one that is executed according to the lottery result of the two special symbols is shown, the present invention is not limited to this and may be executed according to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403. As a result, even during an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a “big hit” game state), it is possible to entertain the movable effect, and it is difficult for the player to get bored and a decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. MPU 1310a, main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value and an error display, and a partition on the game board 5 It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the content of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise and the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly forced. It is a circuit that resets. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described below, and again executes the main control side power-on process described below. Will be done. In this case, since the main power supply side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM will always occur as described later, so that the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in hardware") that updates the big hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state, among the various random numbers related to the game, by hardware. Random number circuit"). This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and the initial value is generated. The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication and within a predetermined numerical range. When all the values in 1 are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeated by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control at the time of acquiring the value from the hard random number circuit with built-in main control as a big hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2004, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2005. Mouth sensor 2401, general winning a prize sensor 3001 which detects the game sphere B which is received in general winning a prize 2001, gate sensor 2601 which detects the game sphere B which passes gate 2002, game which is accepted in first major winning a prize 2006 The first big winning hole sensor 2525 detecting the ball B, the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 are detected. Detection signals from the out sensor 664, a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor for detecting a vibration acting on the game board 5, and the like are supplied to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. Is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port.

Further, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When it is input to the main control board 1310 without any intervention), it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control board 1310. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning opening sensor 2525, the second big winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are transmitted through the panel relay board. It is input to the main control board 1310 via the main control MPU 1310a, that is, indirectly, to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit outputs the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, Each drive signal is output to the special winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second special winning opening solenoid 2563 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the function display unit 1400. To the status indicator, ordinary symbol indicator, ordinary reserved indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special reserved number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special reserved number indicator, round indicator, to Each drive signal is directly output without passing through another board. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various kinds of information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various kinds of information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or a game ball B from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that allows the launch of the game ball, the launch control signal that outputs the game ball B to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the firing permission signal that informs that the firing is permitted is set to the firing permission logic when the firing is permitted, while the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) is the reverse of the firing permission logic when the firing is not permitted. Is set to. The logic of the launch permission signal is, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power restoration), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. Up to the above, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic is set.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning opening sensor 2525, the second big winning opening sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664. In contrast, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas a general winning opening sensor 3001 is a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the variable winning opening 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2401 and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2601 also frequently occur. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

In addition, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B is frequently entered, so the first big winning hole sensor The detection of the game ball B by 2525 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning hole sensor 2525. Further, since a large amount of the game balls B launched in the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, the detection of the game ball B by the out sensor 664 is frequent. Occurs in. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. It should be noted that a proximity switch having high durability and long life may be used regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral controller 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launch solenoid 542, and a ball feed solenoid 145 that performs a ball feed control. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball for maintenance. The game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 is discharged to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and a ball removing switch for starting the ball removing operation. , Are provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro-computer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I/O port as an I/O device, external WDT (external watch dock timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information regarding the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various commands regarding payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball-cutting detection sensor 574, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and the error canceling signal from the error canceling switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED display through the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 through the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a and the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, the fact that the "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number “7” is displayed, the fact that “CR is not connected” (the electric connection is cut off at any position from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, it is informing that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and the signal is received by the payout control I/O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input, an oscillation circuit to output a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launching reference pulse and outputs it to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit.

With respect to the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped is detected by the player's intention. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that notifies the launch of the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 which electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit establishes firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and determines the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, and a launch reference pulse. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with the firing control section 633b for performing the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. You may comprise. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 through a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 160, the peripheral control board 1510 uses a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in detail, has a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on one semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality sound performance, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to. And a stored sound ROM.

In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control ICs are controlled based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 to the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 for the game board decoration drive board A drive signal sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the thrust output adjustment drive motor 381. And door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 The control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted to the display control unit serial. In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the bump output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit The operation of 1512 is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, a sound signal (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, etc.) as sound information is output to the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass frame speaker 622 of the bass frame 4 for bass. By transmitting a 2.1 ch surround signal or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are different from the display command in a plurality of serial input/output. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600 for display. (Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The “line buffer method” means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, in the case where various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and the main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to allow the player to rotate the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and can be driven stronger as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously recorded in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N, so that the game balls The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by abutting the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, which is higher than the highest position, the game ball B is in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, Either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is circulated. Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first special winning opening 2006 which is normally closed unacceptably by the first special winning opening door 2523, and the left second guide passage 2532 is provided. The game ball B that has entered the above rolls on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B flowing through the left guide passage group 2530 is discharged above the gate 2002, and on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003 which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, the left guiding passage group 2530 and the gate. After coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gates 2002 and 2002, it passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, an ordinary lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the ordinary symbols drawn is "normal win", the variable winning opening The variable winning port 2003 closed by the door 2521 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the variable winning port 2003.

In the present embodiment, since the variable winning port 2003 is provided at a portion near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is higher to circulate the left second guide passage 2532 than the left first guide passage 2531. The variable winning port 2003 is accepted with a probability. Then, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the upper plate 201. Paid out to.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from when the ordinary lottery is started until the result of the ordinary symbol is suggested (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, which is also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning port 2003 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 after the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the lottery result for the ordinary symbol is suggested, the suggestion for the lottery result for the ordinary symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is put on hold until the suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is completed. Further, the number of reserved lottery results of ordinary symbols has an upper limit of up to 4, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number is discarded without being reserved. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

At the part of the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, or the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B flowing down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the game ball B that has passed the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W. ..

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharging portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharging portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2004, and thus the first probability is high. Accepted in the start port 2004.

When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probable change (probability change) hit", A lottery for "time reduction (time reduction)", "probability variation time reduction", "probability variation non-time reduction", "second big hit", etc. is performed. If the lottery result of the first special symbol selected by lottery is other than “miss”, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. And the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been lottered is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time).

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first start opening 2004 until the result of the lottery of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variation time), the first start When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol, so the first special symbol is drawn until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol that is previously drawn is completed. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the design is suspended. The number of reservations of the lottery result of the first special symbol to be held is limited to four for the first starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting opening 2004. However, the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start opening 2004 of the start opening unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, the right side of the center character 2500 is reached. It passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540 and is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is implanted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right first guide passage 2541 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006 and an inlet with a space leftward from the inlet of the right first guide passage 2541. And a right second guide passage 2542 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of coming into contact with the stop 1006, it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and the strength of not coming into contact with the stop 1006 (right) When the game ball B is hit with a strength slightly weaker than the hitting), the player enters the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 depending on the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B flowing through the right first guide passage 2541 is discharged to the first guiding region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B flowing through the right second guide passage 2542 is the specific obstacle. It is discharged to the second guiding area 2712 of the nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guide area 2710. Thereby, in the part of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the flow-down speed of the game ball B is suppressed as compared with the normal region.

In the first guidance area 2711 and the second guidance area 2712, the game ball B may come off from the guidance area 2710, and when it comes off the second guidance area 2712 to the outer right side, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below. Highly likely to be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received in the second special winning opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 provided downstream.

In the present embodiment, the right second guide passage 2542 is configured to flow through the first sub-out port 2021 with higher probability than the right second guide passage 2542 is circulated. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to perform the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the right first guide passage 2541 at the time of "right hitting". There is. That is, at the time of "right hitting", the driving operation of greatly rotating the handle 195 is urged so that the gaming ball B is hit with a strength such that the gaming ball B contacts the stopper 1006. With the relatively easy driving operation, the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily enjoyed.

The game ball B that has passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming unit 2550) and has not been received in the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall unit 2552 and the attacker right wall unit 2567 and is the second attacker unit. Enter 2560. In a normal state, the second special winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker section 2560 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be received. The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second special winning opening door 2562, rolls to the left on the second special winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565.

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Inclined wall portions 2418 are provided respectively. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 and the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received in the second starting opening 2005 with a certain probability. The game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received in the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and not received in the second starting opening 2005 or the second sub-out opening 2022 flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418, and the inclined wall portion 2418 is inclined. It rolls diagonally to the lower left, is discharged to the left at a site below the first starting port 2004, and is received in the out port 1008.

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (“right hit”), only the second starting opening 2005 has a chance to accept the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center character 2500, and the right side of the center character 2500 (“ Right-handed”) can be given a premium feeling.

When the game ball B driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the second starting opening 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and in the main control board 1310, a second special symbol (for example, “miss”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”) , "Probability change (probability change) per", "Time reduction (time reduction) per", "Probability change time reduction per hit", "Probability change time reduction per hit", "Second big hit", etc.) are drawn. If the lottery result of the selected second special symbol is other than “miss”, an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. And, the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn is a player who spends a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, which is also referred to as a special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. Suggested by.

In the present embodiment, the second start is started from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the second start opening 2005 until the result of the lottery of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special change time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started, so the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol that was previously drawn is completed until the second special symbol is completed. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the design is suspended. With respect to the number of holding of the lottery result of the second special symbol to be held, with respect to the second starting opening 2005, the upper limit is four, respectively, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2005. Even without holding the lottery result of the second special symbol, it is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005 is the first special symbol that is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004. It is set longer than the special variation time of the lottery result. As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes more time to consume the number of holdings, so that the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting opening 2005 is smaller. Therefore, in a normal state, even if the player hits the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting opening 2005 is likely to be accepted, and the frequency of executing the lottery result of the second special symbol is low. , It is possible to positively cause the player to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, depending on the result of the selection of the first special symbol or the result of the second special symbol that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and the game ball B is ready to be received.

In the case where the first special winning opening 2006 can be accepted, the first special winning opening 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player is left first. The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532. Then, when the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received in the first special winning opening 2006 when the first special winning opening 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 by the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, in the case where the second special winning opening 2007 can be accepted, since the second special winning opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center character 2500, the right side of the center character 2500 is presented to the player. The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed. Then, when the second special winning opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker unit 2560 from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567. When is received in the second special winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

In this way, by allowing the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 to receive the game ball B when the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can receive the game ball B, Since many game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, "small hit", the second special winning opening 2007 is short enough to receive the game ball B. Open and close in between (for example, small hit rush). At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the second prize hole 2007 at the timing when the second prize hole 2007 is opened and the game ball B can be received, the second prize hole 2007 Since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flow-down speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to hit the game ball B at a timing. As a result, the degree of difficulty is given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to entertain the player by making the game more rewarding, and to suppress a decrease in interest. .. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game ball B in the second special winning opening 2007, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that are lottery are “big hit”, after the second special winning opening 2007 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are received in the second special winning opening 2007, the game ball B is satisfied. The opening/closing pattern for closing the unacceptable closed state (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, the "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, the "5R jackpot" is repeated for 5 rounds, and the "15R jackpot" is repeated for 15 rounds, and an advantageous game state advantageous for the player is generated.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" or the second special symbol is drawn ("probability change") or the lottery result of the first special symbol There is a "hit" that changes the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("time saving hit").

If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007, After allowing the game ball B to be received in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a state of probable variation or shortening during a predetermined number of times of variation.

In this embodiment, below the second special winning opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561, and then enters the pseudo game area 2010. The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can receive the game ball B. The game ball B is received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 cannot receive the game ball B, it is discharged from the pseudo out opening 2404 through the front of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo special winning opening 2402, for example, when the second special winning opening 2007 is capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to the “big hit” or the like as described above, the game ball B is opened in the predetermined opening/closing pattern. Acceptable. This pseudo special winning opening 2402 is provided so as to stand out larger than the second special winning opening 2007, so many gaming balls B accepted in the second special winning opening 2007 are received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. By doing so, it is possible to make the player less entertaining and entertaining during the "big hit" game, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest a special symbol lottery result (first special symbol lottery result and second special symbol lottery result). The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of the LEDs that are turned on after the LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off and blinked for a predetermined time. ..

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to suggest a lottery result of special symbols as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each of the icon strings in a state where three image strings each consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. The picture strings are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture rows are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbols. When the special symbol lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three symbol columns are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the special symbol lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) corresponding to the lottery result of the drawn special symbol occurs.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (special variation time)) which suggests the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400, and the time which suggests the lottery result of the special symbol in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row varies). The time until the confirmation image is displayed) is set differently, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottery special symbol. A player participation type effect in which the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player operation type operation can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

In the peripheral control board 1510, the decoration boards provided on the door frame 3, the decoration boards provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back unit 3000 in front of the back. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back-up front production unit 3300, the back-down front production unit 3400, the back-up rear production unit 3500, the back-under rear production unit 3600, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the contact operation section 302 and the push operation section 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment shown in a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the back. is there. FIG. 163(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guiding unit in the right half of the center accessory shown in FIG. 162 as seen from the front, and FIG. 163(b) is seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 164(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 165(a) is a sectional view taken along the soot line in FIG. 164, (b) is a sectional view taken along the sethe line in FIG. 164, and (c) is a soot line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the saw wire, (d) is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the tar line in FIG. 166(a) is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 166(b) is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is different only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a part of the front unit 2000. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5A of the second embodiment, three general winning openings 2001 are provided. Further, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is the normal winning opening 2008, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the gaming board 5 is playing to the normal winning opening 2008. The second starting port 2005 is opened/closed according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by receiving the ball B. Further, in the game board 5A, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

Due to the differences as described above, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting opening sensor, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 of the gaming board 5 is replaced. It is usually replaced by a winning a prize sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 and can guide the game ball B flowing through the right guide passage group 2540. It has a guide unit 2580 and a flat center right front plate 2590 that extends vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guide unit 2580. ..

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating vertically long rectangles in a flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and below the opening portion 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b through which the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 2580 is provided.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape that extends downward from the inlet, extends rightward, and then extends downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open at the front and are closed by the center right front plate 2590. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located substantially in the vertical center of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5A.

Between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, a space where the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed is formed, and the portion of the panel plate 1110 concerned. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward immediately above the first sub-out port 2021. Thereby, the probability that the game ball B discharged downward from the lower right second passage 2550b is lower than the lower right first passage 2550a is accepted in the first sub-out port 2021. In this lower right second passage 2550b, the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guide unit 2580 flows, so to the first sub-out port 2021. In order to reduce the probability of accepting the game ball B, the player can positively perform the driving operation of causing the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when the player hits the ball "right", by hitting it strongly, it becomes easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop 1006. There is no need, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

[8-1. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 2580 separately guides the game balls B that have flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 in a state where they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guide unit 2580 has a first guide passage 2580a for guiding the game ball B from the right first guide passage 2541 and a second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B from the right second guide passage 2542. doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging the game ball B in the left-right direction and the front-back direction.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an inlet opening forward near the upper end and an outlet opening obliquely forward and downward at the lower end. Further, the second guide passage 2580b has an inlet opening toward the front at a position slightly lower than the inlet of the first guide passage 2580a, and an outlet opening toward the front diagonally downward at the lower end.

The ball guide unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a which is opened to the right and a second guide which is attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and opened to the right. The right passage member 2582 is provided with the passage 2580b, and the flat passage closing plate 2583 is attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The ball guiding unit 2580 is formed transparent.

The left passage member 2581 protrudes to the right from a flat-faced side wall portion 2581a extending in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, and a surface facing the right side of the side wall portion 2581a, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower. And has a plurality of inclined portions 2581b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals with which the game balls B can flow in the up-down direction, and are provided so that the lower sides in the vertical direction are alternately different. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are arranged such that the upper ends of the lower inclined portions 2581b extend outward in the front-rear direction with an interval at which the game balls B can flow than the lower ends of the upper inclined portions 2581b. It is provided.

In addition, the left passage member 2581 extends from the upper end of each inclined portion 2581b above the upper inclined portion 2581b, and from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c above the upper inclined portion 2581b. And the exposed ceiling wall portion 2581d.
The top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the upper inclined portion 2581b of the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c stands. Further, the ceiling wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2581b of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2581b and the upper inclined portion 2581b. ..

Further, the left passage member 2581 has a plurality of first protruding portions 2581e protruding rightward from a portion between the vertically spaced apart inclined portions 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a and the inclined portion 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of first projecting piece portions 2581f protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first projecting portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2581b in the front-rear direction, has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2581b, and is formed in a triangular shape with a thin tip. Has been done. The first projecting piece portion 2581f extends vertically, the lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lower rightward.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is low, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the inlet of the first guide passage 2580a. .. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is low, and is located rearward of the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms the lower side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2580a. doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that is opened to the right side, and a plurality of first side wall portions 2582a that protrude to the left side from the surface of the side wall portion 2582a that faces the left side. It has one protruding portion 2582b. When assembled into the ball guiding unit 2580, the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided two by two with one first protrusion 2581e in the front-rear direction in one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. The first projecting portion 2582b has a triangular shape in which the upstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e projects to the left, and the downstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e has an upstream end inclined and extends to the downstream side up to the vicinity of the standing wall section 2581c. It has a trapezoidal shape that projects to the left.

The right passage member 2582 projects rightward from the surface of the side wall portion 2582a that faces the right side, is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower, and is provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals in the vertical direction through which the game balls B can flow, and are provided so that the lower sides in the vertical direction are alternately different. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2582c are arranged such that the upper ends of the lower inclined portions 2582c extend outward in the front-rear direction with a spacing allowing the game ball B to flow from the lower ends of the upper inclined portions 2582c. It is provided.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 extends from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c to the standing wall portion 2582d extending above the upper inclined portion 2582c and from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d to above the upper inclined portion 2582c. And the exposed top wall portion 2582e.
The top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the upper inclined portion 2582c of the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d stands. Further, the ceiling wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2582c of the upper inclined portion 2582c, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2582c and the upper inclined portion 2582c. ..

Further, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second protrusions 2582f protruding rightward from a portion between the vertically spaced apart inclined portions 2582c of the side wall portion 2582a, and the inclined portion 2582c of the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of second projecting piece portions 2582g protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2582d. The second projecting piece portion 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2582c, has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2582c, and has a triangular shape with a thin tip. Has been formed. The second projecting piece portion 2582g extends vertically and has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c and an upper end inclined so as to lower rightward.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the rear end is low, and the front end forms the lower side of the inlet of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end is low and is located rearward of the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, and forms the lower side of the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is opened rightward, and a plurality of first side walls that protrude leftward from the surface of the side wall portion 2583a that faces leftward. It has two protrusions 2583b. When assembled into the ball guiding unit 2580, the plurality of second projecting portions 2583b are provided two by two in the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second projecting portion 2582f therebetween in the front-rear direction. The second projecting portion 2583b has a triangular shape in which the upstream side of the second projecting portion 2582f projects to the left, and the downstream side of the second projecting portion 2582f has its upstream side edge inclined and extends to the downstream side up to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2582d. It has a trapezoidal shape that projects to the left.

In the ball guide unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a through the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540, the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 moves backward. Roll towards. Above the inclined portion 2581b, a first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right so as to move back and forth with the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first protruding portion 2581e, and further guided to the left again by the next first protruding portion 2582b. Then, it rolls to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b onto the lower inclined portion 2581b along the standing wall portion 2581c. At this time, the game ball B guided leftward by the first projecting portion 2582b is guided rightward by the first projecting piece portion 2581f projecting rightward and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. To do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B flowing down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Even above the inclined portion 2581b, the first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right so as to move back and forth with the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the rear-side first projecting piece 2581f is guided to the left by the first projecting portion 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first projecting portion 2581e. Then, it is guided to the left again by the next first protruding portion 2582b and rolls to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, the front first protruding piece 2581f guides it to the right and further flows down onto the lower inclined portion 2581b, and the outlet of the first guide passage 2580a. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

Further, in the ball guide unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, it moves rearward by the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll around. In the second guide passage 2580b, the game ball B flows down while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, similarly to the first guide passage 2580a. More specifically, the second protruding portion 2582f projects from the left above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and the second portion of the passage closing plate 2583 extends from the right to move back and forth with the second protruding portion 2582f. Two projecting portions 2583b project. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second projecting portion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second projecting portion 2582f, and further guided to the left by the next second projecting portion 2583b. Then, it rolls to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c onto the lower inclined portion 2582c along the standing wall portion 2582d. At this time, the game ball B guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b is guided rightward by the second projecting piece portion 2582g projecting rightward and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. To do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B flowing down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward in accordance with the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Also above the inclined portion 2582c, the second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protruding portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right so as to move back and forth with the second protruding portion 2582f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second projecting piece 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second projecting portion 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second projecting portion 2582f. Then, it is guided to the left again by the next second protruding portion 2583b and rolls to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, the second protrusion piece 2582g on the front side guides it to the right and further flows down on the lower inclined portion 2582c, and the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

As described above, according to the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540 is allowed to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, and then discharged downward. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the retention time (flow-down time) of the game ball B at the same height as compared with the case where the game ball B is vertically flown down or is flown down by a spiral passage. You can As a result, the distribution speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, compared with the case where the game ball B is caused to flow down through a spiral passage, the game ball B Therefore, the player can entertain the player with the movement of the game ball B, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the left side surface faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B in the ball guiding unit 2580 moves in the front-rear direction by looking through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to visually recognize the distribution of the game ball B while meandering, and to enjoy the movement of the game ball B.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the flow velocity of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, and therefore, the same effect as the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described above can be achieved. If it explains in full detail, for example, according to the lottery result of the 1st special symbol and the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol which were lottered by acceptance of the game ball B to the 1st starting port 2004 or the 2nd starting port 2005 (for example, " (Small hit) lottery), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker portion 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed with a flicker in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, , Small hit rush) so that the player can drive the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second prize hole 2007 at the timing when the second prize hole 2007 can be accepted. Will be done. At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B at that timing, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of delaying the flow-down speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second special winning opening 2007. The timing of hitting the game ball B can be made difficult. As a result, a difficulty level can be added to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to entertain the player by making the game more rewarding, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the gaps are formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the ceiling wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the ceiling wall portion 2582e, the first guiding passage 2580a and the first guiding passageway 2580a. When a ball clogging occurs inside the second guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. , Compared with the case of forming a passage using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed by the circulation of the game ball B (deformation of the obstacle nail N), and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is formed in a transparent flat plate shape, and covers the front between the vicinity of the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and the upper end of the second attacker unit 2560 so as to cover the front. Is attached to the front end on the outer right side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a penetrating forward and backward in the lower part and accommodating the heads of a plurality of obstructing nails N, respectively, and penetrating forward and backward so that one obstructing nail N It has the 2nd accommodation part 2590b in which a head is accommodated, and the peeling hole 2590c which penetrates back and forth.

The first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b have a panel board of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. The heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted at 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a is constant with respect to the peripheral line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of a plurality of (two or three in the present embodiment) obstacle nails that are accommodated (two or three in the present embodiment). It is provided in the shape of a long hole forming a gap. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstacle nail N. The second storage portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b coincide with the respective obstacle nails N that are planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. It is provided in the part.

This makes it possible to limit the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b, and thus the impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like due to something or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, and to play the game. The ball B can be circulated in a stable state, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in a mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, a stick-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side of the peel hole 2590c when the seal is attached. By pressing the seal from the rear toward the front by the rod-shaped member, a part of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590. Then, the operator can easily remove (peel) the seal from the center right front plate 2590 by pulling the rolled portion of the seal by the operator. As a result, workability such as reattachment work of the seal at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal can be improved.

Since the peeling hole 2590c is provided at the mounting boss portion, an attempt is made to insert a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or a portion where the game ball B flows through the peeling hole 2590c. Also, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the rear side is closed by a mounting screw, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted, and it is possible to prevent an unauthorized act.

It should be noted that if a seal is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c can be made difficult to see from the front by the sticker, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2590c, and at the same time, the player On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the existence of the peeling hole 2590c to be noticed, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2590c.

Further, when a seal is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590a are attached by the seal attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 when assembled on the game board 5. Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a or the second accommodating portion 2590b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the sticker is attached, when the obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first housing portion 2590a and the second housing portion 2590b is bent through the seal, a trace thereof remains on the seal, The defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

[9. Third embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board according to the third embodiment. FIG. 168(a) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the front constituent members, the game panel, and the panel decoration board in the game board of FIG. 167 are assembled, and (b) is a front constituent member of the game board of FIG. 167. It is a perspective view seen from the rear in the state where the game panel and the panel decoration substrate are assembled. FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the front constituent member, the game panel, and the panel decoration board in the gaming board of FIG. 167 seen from the front, and FIG. 170 is the front constituent member, the gaming panel of the gaming board of FIG. 167. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the panel decoration board in a disassembled state seen from behind. Note that, in FIG. 167, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is shown by hatching.

In the game board 5B according to the third embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is translucent white and opaque, and a predetermined pattern (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. It has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the front sheet 1130 is attached and the panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A. Detailed description of the components will be omitted.

The game board 5B defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially quadrangular shape in front view, and a rear end of the game region 5a which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A plate-shaped panel panel on which a plate-shaped game panel 1100, a front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a plurality of LEDs 1141 capable of irradiating the game panel 1100 from behind are mounted on the front surface. And a substrate 1140.

The front component 1000 is the same as the front component 1000 of the game board 5 of the first embodiment. The front component 1000 is transparent.

The gaming panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110A whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear side of the front component member 1000. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The panel plate 1110A of the present embodiment is formed to be translucent and white and opaque. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed transparent.

[9-1. Game Panel of Game Board of Third Embodiment]
Next, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170. The game panel 1100 of the game board 5B has an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and a translucent white opaque flat panel panel 1110A and a panel panel. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which holds the outer periphery of 1110A and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and to which the back unit 3000 is attached, is provided on the rear surface.

The plate thickness of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that.

The panel plate 1110A is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the portion corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110A is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Since the panel plate 1110A is opalescent in milky white, as shown in FIG. 167, the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A in the back unit 3000 or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is removed. The part cannot be seen from the front (player side).

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is translucent and white and opaque, the back front peripheral decoration 3201, the back top front decoration 3310, and the back bottom front decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear side. When a decorative body such as 3410 is made to emit light, the light from the rear is transmitted through the panel plate 1110A, the player can visually recognize the light emitting decoration of the decorative body, and the emission color of the decorative body is transmitted as it is. It is possible to show the player a colorful light emission effect.

In addition, in the panel plate 1110A, a portion overlapping the front constituent member 1000 in the front-rear direction is transparently formed in the front constituent member 1000, so that it can be visually recognized from the front through the front constituent member 1000 (see FIG. 167). reference).

Further, the panel plate 1110A has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the plate thickness is thin. And a plurality of engaging stepped portions 1114 (see FIG. 169). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engagement claws 1125 and the engagement pieces 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

In the panel plate 1110A, a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper side of the center in a front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the flow direction (circumferential direction of the frame) of the game ball B is left, except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

This panel plate 1110A has, in addition to the opening 1112 and the positioning hole 1113, a nail hole (not shown) for implanting the obstacle nail N, and a screw hole for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500. , Etc. are formed in plural. The nail holes and screw holes penetrate the panel plate 1110A and the front sheet 1130 in the front-rear direction.

More specifically, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 according to the present embodiment includes a translucent main body portion 1151 and a translucent main body portion 1151 with a specific portion 1152 having a different light transmittance. Have In the panel plate 1110A, the main body 1151 and the specific portion 1152 are integrally formed of the same material, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 is made different by making the thickness smaller than that of the main body 1151. There is.

The specific portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic portion of the front sheet 1130 in a pattern (not shown). The specifying portion 1152 is formed by a blind hole-shaped recess 1115 that is recessed in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 toward the front, and the front surface is located on the same plane as the front surface of the main body portion 1151. The rear surface is located in front of the rear surface of the main body 1151 (see FIG. 171).

A plurality of specific parts 1152 of the present embodiment are provided in a part of the guide area 2710 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the game panel 1100A is arranged. Specifically, it is provided at the portion of the first guide area 2711 in the guide area 2710. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are caused to emit light, the rear of the guide area 2710 can be made to emit light, and the plurality of specifying portions 1152 can make the first guide area 2711 brightly shine.

The thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the range of 10% to 80% of the thickness of the main body portion 1151. The reason why the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the above range is that if the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is smaller than the above range, the strength of the portion of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A is reduced. This is because there is a risk that irregularities may occur in the specific unit 1152 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, or damage may occur due to the circulation or collision of the game ball B. Further, if the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is thicker than the above range, the light transmittance approaches the light transmittance of the main body portion 1151. Therefore, even if the rear LED 1141 emits light, the same brightness as that of the main body portion 1151 is obtained. This is because there is a possibility that the effect of the light emission effect by the specifying unit 1152 cannot be fully exerted.

The specifying portion 1152 is provided so as to avoid the obstacle nail N on the panel plate 1110A. That is, the specific portion 1152 is provided at a portion where the obstacle nail N is not implanted. It is desirable that the specific portion 1152 be provided at a site that is a certain distance (for example, 1 mm or more) from the site where the obstacle nail N is implanted. As a result, the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main body portion 1151, is provided so as to avoid the portion where the obstacle nail N is implanted, so that the portion around the base of the obstacle nail N in the main body portion 1151 becomes thin. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the holding strength of the obstacle nail N by making the depth of the root of the obstacle nail N relatively shallow.

The panel plate 1110A of the present embodiment is formed of milky white high-impact polystyrene (HIPS) as a white system. This HIPS is significantly cheaper than the acrylic resin generally used for transparent game boards. Further, in the present embodiment, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is set to 20% of the thickness of the main body portion 1151, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152 is set to the thickness of the main body portion 1151. 40% of that. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, since the thickness of the main body portion 1151 is 10 mm, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is 2 mm, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped concave portion 1115 is 4 mm.

It is desirable that the translucent opaque panel panel 1110A has a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it is difficult to perform light emission decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it is difficult to obtain it as an opaque material. Further, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the member provided at the rear may be easily recognized, and the effect of concealment may not be sufficiently obtained.

Although the panel plate 1110A is white and milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), “white Munsell value (N 9.5)”, “white powder Munsell value (2.5Y) 9.2/0.5)”, “Urban color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)”, “Production color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)”, “Lead white Munsell value (N 9)”, “Oyster” "White Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Gray white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", " Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", It may be a white type such as "Sakura color Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5)".

Further, although the panel plate 1110A is formed of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", " It may be formed of "polyethylene", "polypropylene", "glass", or the like. Further, although the panel plate 1110A is white based on the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), it may be white based on the colorant added to the transparent material.

In this panel plate 1110A, an opening 1112, a positioning hole 1113, and the like are formed by cutting with a front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of a flat base material. More specifically, in the panel board 1110A, first, the front sheet 1130 is attached to one surface of the flat base material. Then, by using an NC router processing machine or the like, from the surface side (front surface side) to which the front sheet 1130 of the base material is adhered The engaging step portion 1114 and the like are processed. Next, the opening 1112 and the specific portion 1152 are processed from the surface side (back surface side) to which the front sheet 1130 of the base material is not attached. And finally, the panel board 1110A is completed by processing the nail hole (inclined nail lower hole) for implanting the obstacle nail N from the surface side. After that, the obstacle nail N is planted in the nail hole by using the planting machine.

By the way, when cutting is performed using an end mill or the like by an NC router processing machine or the like, since cutting waste is discharged to the base end side of the end mill, the end surface of the end mill is cut from the tip end side of the end mill to the cutting target. A force acts in the direction toward. Therefore, when cutting is performed by the end mill from the front surface side to which the front sheet 1130 is attached, the cutting waste is discharged to the side opposite to the base material (panel plate 1110A) with respect to the front sheet 1130, and the force acts. Therefore, the front sheet 1130 is easily rolled from the base material, and burrs are easily generated on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the penetrating opening 1112 is cut from the back surface side by the end mill, so that the cutting waste is discharged to the base material side with respect to the front sheet 1130 and the force acts. However, since a force acts on the front sheet 1130 in a direction in which the front sheet 1130 is in close contact with the base material, the front sheet 1130 becomes difficult to peel off, and the shearing force on the front sheet 1130 becomes strong, so that burrs on the cutting end surface of the front sheet 1130 It can be hard to occur, and it can improve the appearance.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 is processed at the timing of processing the opening 1112, it is not necessary to purposely perform the setup change of the base material for the processing of the specific portion 1152, and the processing time slightly increases. Thus, the specific portion 1152 can be processed, and an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

By the way, a drill is used in the cutting process (drilling process) of circular through holes such as part of the positioning holes 1113, nail holes, and screw holes, but the front sheet 1130 is attached. When cutting with a drill from the reverse side, a strong force acts on the front sheet 1130 in the direction opposite to the base material when the holes penetrate, so that the vicinity of the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 is rolled from the base material. Or, burrs are easily generated on the cutting end face. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, cutting processing (drilling processing) of part of the positioning holes 1113, nail holes, screw holes, and the like is performed from the front surface side, and thus the cutting end surface of the front sheet 1130 is cut. It is possible to make it difficult for burr to occur and to improve the appearance.

Although the positioning hole 1113 and the engagement step portion 1114 are processed from the front surface side, they are located outside the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5B, and are visually recognized from the player side. Since it is difficult, even if some burr is generated on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, the appearance does not deteriorate. Further, in the nail hole or the screw hole, since the obstacle nail N, the screw, or the like is inserted from the front surface side, even if the cutting end surface of the front sheet 1130 has a burr, the burr is caused by the obstacle nail N, the screw, or the like. , It will be pushed into the hole and the appearance will not deteriorate. Further, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque, even if a burr on the cutting end face of the front sheet 1130 is pushed into the hole, it can be made invisible from the outside by the opaque panel plate 1110A, and the appearance is improved. You can

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110A and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110A (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1127 (see FIG. 169) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110A and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion is approximately the same size as the game area 5a. The through hole 1121 is provided to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008 (see FIGS. 168(b) and 170).

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion 1127 and a plurality of projecting pins 1124 protruding forward from the holding step portion 1127 and respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110A. A plurality of engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110A, and a panel protruding upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion 1127. The plate 1110 is provided with a pair of engaging pieces 1126 that engage with the two engaging step portions 1114 on the lower side.

The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110A with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above and moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper part and the lower left part. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110A can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion 1127. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110A is positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120.

In the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in the front is made white and opaque, and thus the end face of the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 and the like are attached. Is white. Therefore, compared with the case where a plywood is used for the game panel, the end surface of the opening 1112 can be made less visible, and the end surface can be beautifully finished, the end surface can be decorated, or a center accessory attached to the opening 1112. It is not necessary to hide the end face by 2500 or the like, and the cost of the game panel 1100 can be reduced. Further, even if the center accessory 2500 or the like attached to the opening 1112 is made of a transparent material, the end surface of the opening 1112 is inconspicuous, so that the center accessory 2500 or the like can be made of a transparent material.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made white and opaque, a white decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided on the end surface of the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached. The illusion that the decoration board is integrated with the end surface of the opening 1112 can be made to be inconspicuous, and the panel board 1110A can be made to emit light by causing the LED of the decoration board to emit light. It is possible to emit light or to emit light from the center side of the center accessory 2500.

[9-2. Front Sheet of Game Board of Third Embodiment]
Next, the front sheet 1130 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described. The front sheet 1130 is attached to the entire front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 171 and the like). The front sheet 1130 is formed of a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm and excellent in abrasion resistance. Although not shown, the front sheet 1130 has a predetermined pattern printed thereon. The front sheet 1130 is formed so that the LED 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light so that a part of the pattern is brightly shined through the panel plate 1110A.

Although not shown, the design of the front sheet 1130 has a characteristic portion, and the specifying portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is provided behind the characteristic portion. Thereby, the characteristic part of the pattern can be made to shine brighter than other parts through the specifying part 1152.

The front sheet 1130 (the pattern thereof) may have a transparent portion, an opaque and translucent portion, or an opaque portion. May be. For example, if the front sheet 1130 is surrounded by a non-light-transmitting (low light-transmitting) portion around the portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152, the visual contrast can be increased, and the specific portion 1152 can be obtained. The part corresponding to can be made brighter and brighter.

As the material of the front sheet 1130 in the present embodiment, "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", Examples thereof include “polyethylene resin”, “polystyrene resin”, “impact-resistant polystyrene resin” and “polyvinyl chloride”.

The front sheet 1130 is attached to the base material of the panel plate 1110A before processing, and is cut together with the base material.

According to the front sheet 1130 of the present embodiment, since it is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel plate 1110A from the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to use an inexpensive material having low wear resistance as the material of the panel plate 1110A, and it is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[9-3. Panel decoration board of game board of third embodiment]
Next, the panel decoration substrate 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. The panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided behind a portion of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged, that is, a portion where the guide region 2710 is provided in the front. The panel decoration substrate 1140 has white solder resist on its front and rear surfaces, and its front and rear surfaces are formed in white. A plurality of LEDs 1141 are mounted on the front surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140. The plurality of LEDs 1141 includes a first LED 1141a located behind the specifying portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151.

The plurality of LEDs 1141 on the panel decoration substrate 1140 are high-luminance full-color LEDs. The first LED 1141a located behind the specifying unit 1152 may be a narrow-angle LED with a narrow irradiation range, and the second LED 1141b located behind the main body 1151 may be a wide-angle LED with a wide irradiation range. ..

Although illustration is omitted, a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing the plurality of LEDs 1141 to emit light, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140.

When the second LED 1141b is made to emit light, the panel decoration substrate 1140 can make the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A emit light brightly behind the second guiding region 2712, and when the first LED 1141a is made to emit light, the panel plate 1110A is made to emit light. A region behind the first guidance region 2711 can be made to emit light through the specifying portion 1152 so as to be brighter than the second guidance region 2712.

[9-4. Light emission effect by the game panel and the panel decoration substrate of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, a light emitting effect by the game panel 1100 and the panel decoration substrate 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 schematically shows the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration substrate, and (a) of (a) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration substrate turned off. (A2) is an explanatory view showing (a1) in a cross section, (b1) of (b) is an explanatory view seen from the front in a state where the LED of the panel decoration substrate is turned on, and (b2) is ( It is explanatory drawing which shows b1) in a cross section. Note that, in FIG. 171, for convenience, the color of the white (milky white) material of the panel plate 1110A is dark gray, the light amount is shown by the light and shade, and the pattern of the front sheet 1130 is omitted.

In the game board 5B of this embodiment, a translucent front sheet 1130 is attached to the front surface of a translucent white (here, milky white) opaque panel plate 1110A, and the panel plate Behind 1110A, a panel decoration substrate 1140 having a plurality of LEDs 1141 mounted on the front surface is provided. The panel plate 1110A includes a main body portion 1151 having a predetermined thickness and a plurality of specifying portions 1152 having a smaller thickness than the main body portion 1151. The identifying portion 1152 is formed by processing a blind hole-shaped recess 1115 in the main body portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) so as to be recessed in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface toward the front. Therefore, the front surface of the specifying portion 1152 is flush with the front surface of the main body portion 1151.

The panel decoration substrate 1140 is coated with a white solder resist on its front and rear surfaces. The plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 includes a second LED 1141b located behind the main body 1151 of the panel board 1110A and a first LED 1141a located behind the identifying section 1152.

In the normal state where the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are not emitted, the game board 5B has a uniform brightness on the entire front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) as shown in FIG. 171(a). That is, the specific portion 1152 and the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided on the rear side cannot be seen from the front player side.

Since the inside of the panel plate 1110A is uniformly opaque, the amount of light attenuated (decreased) as the light incident from the rear surface travels forward. In the panel plate 1110A, the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 are made of the same opaque material, and the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is different from the thickness of the main body portion 1151. 1152 differs in the amount of attenuation of the light amount from the front surface to the light emitted from the front surface to the front, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 and the light transmittance of the main portion 1151 are different.

From this normal state, when a plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the light emitted from the LEDs 1141 to the front is displayed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A (main body 1151 and specific portion 1152). It will be irradiated and will enter into the inside which has translucency.

The light emitted forward from the second LED 1141b provided behind the thick main body portion 1151 enters the inside from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 while spreading in a truncated cone shape, and further reaches the front surface. As the light spreads, the amount of light is relatively greatly attenuated by the opaque material (see (b2) in FIG. 171(b)). As a result, a portion in front of the second LED 1141b on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape with a relatively large diameter and emits light brighter than other portions (( in FIG. 171(b)). See b1)).

On the other hand, the light emitted forward from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main body portion 1151, is emitted to the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 while spreading in a truncated cone shape. However, the light spreading from the first LED 1141a is diffusely reflected on the inner surface of the concave portion 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is irradiated with the spread suppressed. Therefore, in the specifying unit 1152, the distance from the rear surface to the LED 1141 (first LED 1141a) is longer than the distance from the rear surface of the main body unit 1151 to the LED 1141 (second LED 1141b), and the rear surface of the specifying unit 1152 is irradiated with the light. The amount of light emitted is almost the same as the amount of light emitted to the rear surface of the main body 1151.

The amount of light that has entered the interior from the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is attenuated (decreased) as it travels forward, but since it is thin, it becomes a truncated cone shape by the time it reaches the front surface. The spread range is narrow and the attenuation of the light quantity by the opaque material is relatively small (see (b2) in FIG. 171(b)). Thus, the front portion of the first LED 1141a (specific portion 1152) on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape with a smaller diameter than the front portion of the second LED 1141b, and the front portion of the second LED 1141b. The light is emitted so as to shine brighter than the site (see (b1) in FIG. 171(b)). In the present embodiment, the specific plate 1152 emits light with the same brightness as when the panel plate 1110A is made transparent.

Therefore, in the pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A, the specific portion 1152 is provided behind the characteristic portion of the pattern, whereby the panel decoration substrate By the light emission of the first LED 1141a of 1140, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the characteristic portion of the pattern is bright. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, a gaming machine with a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the characteristic part of the pattern shines brightly, giving the player a chance. Since it is possible to suggest the arrival of the game, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. it can.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is applied as a design of the front sheet 1130, and a specific portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic part of the character (for example, eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.). When the light is emitted from the first LED 1141a behind the specific unit 1152 to the front, the characteristic portion of the character can be made to shine brightly by the specific unit 1152, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline of interest. Can be made.

According to this embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a in which the game ball B flows is provided in the front and the front sheet 1130 having a predetermined pattern is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. It is composed of the white main body portion 1151 having the property and the specific portion 1152 which has a higher light transmittance than the main body portion 1151 and is provided at a portion corresponding to the design of the front sheet 1130. Accordingly, when the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body portion 1151 on the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light, the light from the second LED 1141b diffuses in the main body portion 1151 and brightens the design of the front sheet 1130. When the first LED 1141a provided behind the specifying unit 1152 emits light, the amount of light that travels straight is higher than that of the main body 1151. Since the number increases, the portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152 in the pattern can be made brighter than the other portions, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Therefore, in comparison with a conventional pachinko machine that uses plywood or a transparent plate as the game panel 1100, the inside of the game area 5a that has never been seen before due to the design of the front sheet 1130 shining. Since the pachinko machine 1 that self-luminesces with brightness can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided. The fact that a part of the pattern shines brightly can indicate to the player that an opportunity has arrived, so that it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and the player's game It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for and suppress a decline in interest.

[9-5. Specific Part of Different Embodiment in Game Board of Third Embodiment]
Next, another embodiment of the identifying unit 1152 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174. FIG. 172(a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of a part of the game panel in which the specifying unit having a different form from the specifying unit of FIG. 171 is provided, and FIG. 172(b) shows the specifying unit having a different form provided. It is an explanatory view showing a part of game board in which it is shown in a perspective view, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a game panel in which a specific part of a different form is further provided in a perspective view. FIG. 173(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a game panel provided with a specific portion having a different thickness together with a panel decoration substrate, and FIG. 173(b) shows a specific portion having a conical rear surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gaming panel which exists with a panel decoration board in a cross section, and (c) is a gaming panel with which the specific part which provided the light-shielding film was provided in the side surface of the blind hole-shaped recessed section with a panel decoration board. And (d) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the game panel, in which a specific portion in which a light-shielding sleeve is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess is provided, together with a panel decoration substrate. FIG. 174(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a game panel provided with a specific portion formed by a groove-shaped recess together with a panel decoration substrate, and FIG. 174(b) is provided with a substrate accommodation recess for accommodating the panel decoration substrate. It is an explanatory view showing a game panel with a panel decoration substrate in a cross section, and (c) is a panel decoration of a game panel in which a specific portion filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the rear surface of the game panel. It is explanatory drawing shown with a board|substrate in a cross section, (d) is a description which shows the game panel with which the specific part which filled the transparent material was provided in the recessed hole-shaped recessed part from the front of a game panel with a panel decoration board in a cross section. It is a figure.

First, in the embodiment of FIG. 172(a), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the specific portion 1152 is formed by the triangular prism-shaped blind hole-shaped concave portion 1115 formed in the main body portion 1151. In this embodiment, the rear surface (the shape in front view) of the identifying unit 1152 is triangular. Accordingly, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided on the rear side is caused to emit light, the portion of the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A can be caused to emit light in a triangular bright shape.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 172(b), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the specific portion 1152 is formed by the concave portion 1115 of the star-shaped blind hole formed in the main body portion 1151. In this embodiment, the rear surface (the shape in front view) of the identifying unit 1152 is star-shaped. Accordingly, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided on the rear side is caused to emit light, the part of the specific portion 1152 on the panel plate 1110A can be caused to emit light so as to shine brightly in a star shape.

In the embodiments of FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b), the shape of the rear surface of the specifying portion 1152 is shown as a triangle or a star, but the shape is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this and may be “elliptical” or “quadrangular”. , “Pentagon”, “hexagon”, “polygon”, “heart”, “amorphous”, “shape of predetermined character or item”, “shape of character such as logo”, and the like.

Also, in the embodiment of FIG. 172(c), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the specific portion 1152 is formed by the hexagonal cylindrical blind hole-shaped concave portion 1115 formed in the main body portion 1151. In other words, the specific portion 1152 is formed by the groove-shaped concave portion 1115 having a constant width and extending along the outer periphery of the hexagon. In this embodiment, the rear surface (the shape in front view) of the specific portion 1152 is an annular hexagon. Accordingly, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided on the rear side is caused to emit light, the portion of the specific portion 1152 in the panel plate 1110A can be caused to emit light in a ring-shaped hexagon so as to shine brightly. In addition, one first LED 1141a may be provided for one specific portion 1152 (recess 1115), or a plurality of first LEDs 1141a may be provided depending on the size and shape of the specific portion 1152.

In the embodiment of FIG. 172(c), the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shown as an annular hexagon, but the shape is not limited to this, and is “annular circle” or “annular ellipse”. , "Annular triangle", "annular quadrangle", "annular pentagon", "annular polygon", "annular star", "annular heart", "annular irregular shape", "predetermined" The shape of the outer circumference of a character or an item", the "shape of the outer circumference of a character such as a logo", or the like may be used.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 172(c), the specific portion 1152 formed by annularly extending a groove having a constant width is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific portion 1152 extends linearly or curvedly. The specific portion 1152 may be formed by the groove formed.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 172, since the specifying portion 1152 has various shapes, the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 is caused to emit light as the game progresses, whereby the front surface of the game panel 1100 (front sheet 1130). The part in front of the specific portion 1152 can be made bright with the same shape as the rear surface of the specific portion 1152. As a result, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at the same time, the player can think that something is good. , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Specifically, for example, the front sheet 1130 is provided with a predetermined character pattern, and a panel portion 1110A of the game panel 1100 is provided with a groove shape along the outer periphery of the character to form a specific portion 1152, and a rear panel. When the first LED 1141a of the decorative substrate 1140 is caused to emit light, the outer circumference of the character can be made to shine brightly, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that can strongly attract the player's interest.

Subsequently, in the embodiment of FIG. 173(a), the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is made different in one panel plate 1110A. As a result, the thicker the specific portion 1152 is, the lower the light transmittance is. Therefore, even if the first LED 1141a provided at the rear is made to emit the same brightness, the thicker the specific portion 1152 is, the brighter the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is. Get dark. Therefore, since the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) emits light with various brightness, it is possible to show the player more diversified light emission effects and prevent the player from getting tired. ..

Further, when the specific portion 1152 is formed by cutting, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed only by changing the cutting program. Alternatively, when the specific portion 1152 (game panel 1100) is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed only by changing the protrusion amount of the core pin for forming the specific portion 1152. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the thickness of the specifying unit 1152, and it is possible to easily cope with design changes and model changes, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. At the same time, it is possible to easily provide the specifying unit 1152 having a higher staging effect, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

In the embodiment of FIG. 173(b), the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 is formed in a conical shape with the center being the thinnest. As a result, the center of the specific portion 1152 becomes the thinnest, and thus, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 is caused to emit light, a light emission effect in which the center of the panel plate 1110A in front of the specific portion 1152 shines brightest. It can be shown to the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 has a conical shape, the reduction in strength of the panel plate 1110A due to the formation of the recessed portion 1115 is suppressed as compared with the case where the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is reduced as a whole. be able to. This makes it possible to make the specific portion 1152 shine brighter while maintaining the strength of the panel plate 1110A. Further, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 has a conical shape, it can be easily processed by a drill having a conical tip, and an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the embodiment of FIG. 173(b), the rear surface of the specifying portion 1152 has a conical shape whose center is located forward, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a cone whose center is located rearward is shown. It may be shaped like a circle, and can be made to illuminate in an annular shape by the light from the first LED 1141a.

In addition, the rear surface of the specifying unit 1152 may have a “pyramidal shape”, a “relief shape imitating a character, an item, a logo, or the like”, a “geometric pattern shape”, or the like. When the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 has a relief shape or a geometrical pattern shape, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 varies depending on the portion so as to follow the shape of the rear surface. Therefore, the light transmittance varies depending on the portion of the specific portion 1152. Due to the difference, the light from the first LED 1141a allows light with a shade along the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 to be seen at a position in front of the specific portion 1152 on the panel plate 1110A, and the panel plate 1110A (front sheet). A predetermined character, a pattern, or the like can be projected on the front surface of 1130), and it is possible to provide a light-emission effect capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 173(c), a light-shielding coating 1153 is provided on the side surface of a blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152. The coating film 1153 is formed by applying a paint having a high light-shielding property and attaching a film or a metal foil having a high light-shielding property. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 173(d), a light blocking sleeve 1154 is provided (inserted) in the blind hole-shaped recess 1115. The sleeve 1154 is made of synthetic resin, paper, wood, metal, or the like having high light shielding properties. The sleeve 1154 is attached to the recess 1115 by press fitting or adhesion. Alternatively, the sleeve 1154 is provided by insert molding or two-color molding when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is injection molded.

According to the embodiment of FIGS. 173(c) and (d), when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind the specifying unit 1152 is caused to emit light, the specifying unit in the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) is displayed. Since only the part in front of 1152 can be made to shine brightly, it is possible to surely exert the decorative effect and the effect of the brilliance of the part, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

More specifically, in the panel plate 1110A, the side surface of the recessed portion 1115 forming the specific portion 1152 is formed by the translucent main body portion 1151 and thus is provided behind the specific portion 1152. When the light from the first LED 1141a present is applied to the side surface of the concave portion 1115, a part of the applied light enters the main body portion 1151. The light entering the main body portion 1151 causes the panel plate 1110A to be exposed. Areas around the specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 of FIG. Therefore, the periphery of the specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 lights up together with the specific portion 1152, and the shape of the specific portion 1152 becomes unclear, or a portion of the design of the front sheet 1130 that does not correspond to the specific portion 1152 emits light. By doing so, the effect of light emission by the identifying unit 1152 may be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 having a high light-shielding property are provided on the side surface of the concave portion 1115 forming the specific portion 1152, light is incident from the side surface into the main body portion 1151. Can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the portion around the specific portion 1152 in the main body 1151 from being illuminated by the light from the first LED 1141a behind the specific portion 1152, and it is possible to make only the specific portion 1152 brightly shine, It is possible to surely bring out the effect of production by the brightness of the specific portion 1152, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

Note that the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 may have high light reflectance. Accordingly, the light from the first LED 1141a can be diffusely reflected by the inner surface of the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 to be guided (guided) forward, and thus the light emitted from the first LED 1141a to the front can be changed. Most of the light can be emitted to the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, and the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brighter.

Further, in the embodiments of FIGS. 173(c) and 173(d), the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 are provided on the side surfaces of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 may be provided on the side surface of the groove-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152.

Next, in the embodiment of FIG. 174(a), the second LED 1141b is provided behind the main body portion 1151 between the two specific portions 1152 formed by the groove-shaped recess 1115. Thus, the first LED 1141a provided behind the specifying unit 1152 can cause the part (range a) of the specifying unit 1152 to shine brightly and can be sandwiched between the specifying units 1152 in the main body 1151. By the light emission of the second LED 1141b provided behind the existing part (range b), only the part (range b) sandwiched by the specific portions 1152 can be made to shine brightly, and the boundary due to the light and darkness of the light is clear. It is possible to show the luminescent effect to the player.

More specifically, in the panel plate 1110A, since the main body 1151 has a light-transmitting property, when the light from the second LED 1141b provided in the rear enters the rear surface of the main body 1151, the light is emitted. Will also diffuse in the direction along the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, but if the panel plate 1110A has a groove-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, the light is reflected by the recess 1115. Therefore, the light is not diffused to the opposite main body portion 1151 side beyond the specific portion 1152. From this, in FIG. 174(a), when the second LED 1141b is caused to emit light, only the part (range b) sandwiched by the specifying part 1152 can be made to emit bright light, and the part outside the specifying part 1152 is illuminated. The part can be darkened.

Therefore, for example, when the specific portion 1152 formed by the groove is provided along the outer periphery of the character or the like having a characteristic in the design of the front sheet 1130, the first portion of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind the character is displayed. By the light from the second LED 1141b, it is possible to make only the character emit light while keeping the area outside the character dark, and the light from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specifying unit 1152 causes the outer circumference of the character to move. You can make it shine. As a result, the character can be made conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a variety of light emission effects can be achieved by appropriately setting the light emission patterns of the first LED 1141a and the second LED 1141b. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be shown to the player and entertain the player.

In the embodiment of FIG. 174(b), a board accommodating recess 1155 which is recessed forward is provided on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) so that the panel accommodating board 1140 is accommodated in the board accommodating recess 1155. It is the one. Accordingly, since the rear surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140 can be located in front of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A, it is possible to easily secure a space rearward of the panel plate 1110A, and the decorative body of the rear unit 3000. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting an effect having a higher effect by relatively increasing the above.

In addition, since the panel decoration substrate 1140 is housed in the substrate housing recess 1155, the first LED 1141a provided behind the specifying unit 1152 can be brought closer to the rear surface of the specifying unit 1152, and thus the specifying unit 1152 can be further expanded. It can be made to shine brightly.

In the embodiment of FIGS. 174 (c) and (d), a recess 1115 such as a blind hole or a groove for forming the specific portion 1152 is filled with a transparent filling portion 1156. The filling portion 1156 may be formed by forming the specific portion 1152 with the concave portion 1115 and then providing the filling portion 1156 having the same shape as the concave portion 1115 by press fitting or bonding. Alternatively, when injection molding the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the filling portion 1156 may be provided by insert molding or two-color molding. According to the present embodiment, the filling portion 1156 allows the panel plate 1110A to have a constant thickness, which reduces the strength and rigidity of the panel plate 1110A as compared with the case where the hollow recess 1115 is formed. Can be suppressed.

More specifically, in the embodiment of FIG. 174(d), the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is located rearward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. A filling portion 1156 is filled in a recess 1115 such as a blind hole or a groove in front of the specifying portion 1152 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are flush with each other. Thereby, the surface of the panel plate 1110A can be made a flat surface without unevenness, the front sheet 1130 can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A in a good state, and the surface on which the game ball B is distributed. Can be a flat surface.

In addition, in the panel plate 1110A, the front surface of the identifying portion 1152 may be located rearward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 may be located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. That is, the specific portion 1152 thinner than the main body portion 1151 may be provided at an intermediate portion in the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (main body portion 1151). In this case, it is preferable that at least a portion in front of the specific portion 1152 is filled with the filling portion 1156 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are flush with each other. Thereby, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A can be flattened, and the front sheet 1130 can be attached in a good state without floating.

[9-6. Game Panels of Different Embodiments in the Game Board of Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, in the game board 5B of the third embodiment, a game panel 1100A of a different embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175(a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration substrate whose plate thickness is changing, and FIG. 175(b) is an explanatory view showing a relationship different from that of (a). In FIG. 175, the part where the board thickness of the game panel 1100A is changing is shown. The game panel 1100A of the present embodiment has a main body portion 1151 having a predetermined thickness, and a specific portion 1152 having a light transmittance increased by being thinner than the main body portion 1151. Behind the game panel 1100A, a first LED 1141a located behind the specifying unit 1152 and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body unit 1151 (not shown in FIG. 175) are mounted on the front surface. A panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided.

In the game panel 1100A of the present embodiment, the plate thickness of a portion where a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted (for example, the portion where the game area 5a is provided in the front) is increased, and the thickness of the other portions is decreased. ing. Thereby, in the game panel 1100A, it is possible to reduce the weight while maintaining the holding strength of the obstacle nail N. Further, by forming the game panel 1100A of the present embodiment by injection molding, the amount of synthetic resin applied to the game panel 1100A can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is formed to have a constant thickness, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the embodiment of FIG. 175(a), the panel decoration board 1140 is extended to the rear of the portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A is changed, and behind the portion where the plate thickness is changed, An LED 1141c capable of irradiating light forward is provided. As a result, when the LED 1141c is caused to emit light, the portion in front of the portion on the front surface of the game panel 1100A where the plate thickness is changed emits light so that it becomes brighter toward the left in the drawing. That is, with the light from the LED 1141c, the periphery of the game area 5a can be made to emit light in a ring shape so as to be brighter toward the outside. For this reason, in this embodiment, the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the plate thickness is changed is a kind of the specifying portion 1152.

Note that, in the embodiment of FIG. 175(a), the portion where the plate thickness is changed is the peripheral portion of the game area 5a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in order to attach the center accessory 2500 and the like. The plate thickness may be changed by slanting the end surface of the opening 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the LED 1141c may be provided behind it.

In the embodiment of FIG. 175(b), a portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A is changed outside the portion where the plate thickness is changed in the game panel 1100A in a direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100A. A second panel decoration substrate 1145, on which an LED 1146 capable of irradiating light is mounted, is provided. As a result, when the LED 1146 is caused to emit light, light is emitted toward the portion along the front surface of the game panel 1100A to the portion where the plate thickness is changed, and the light that has entered the inside of the game panel 1100A from that portion is emitted. By diffusing, the part in front of the part where the plate thickness is changed in the game panel 1100A and the part inside thereof can be made to emit light darker than the embodiment of FIG. 175(a). Therefore, for example, in the case where the portion where the plate thickness is changed is the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, the light from the LED 1146 can emit light in an annular shape from the peripheral edge of the game area 5a to the inside with a constant width.

[9-7. Features of the game board of the third embodiment]
Subsequently, main features of the game board 5B according to the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170 and the like. As described above, the game board 5B of the third embodiment includes the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and provided with the game area 5a in the front, and the game panel 1100. It includes a front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface and having a predetermined pattern, and a panel decoration substrate 1140 capable of irradiating the game panel 1100 with light from the rear.

The game panel 1100 is provided with a game area 5a in the front and a white opaque flat panel panel 1110A in which a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted, and the panel panel 1110A is detachably held from the front. A transparent frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. The panel plate 1110A includes a main body 1151 having a light-transmitting property and a specific portion 1152 having a higher light transmittance than the main body 1151. The specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is provided behind the characteristic portion of the design (not shown) of the front sheet 1130.

The panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided in the front-rear direction at a position between the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A and the rear surface of the panel holder 1120. The panel decoration substrate 1140 has a white surface (front surface and rear surface). The panel decoration substrate 1140 has a plurality of LEDs 1141 capable of radiating light forward mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs 1141 includes a first LED 1141a located behind the specifying portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151.

According to the game board 5B of the present embodiment, according to the progress of the game (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005). When the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body part 1151 of the panel plate 1110A in the panel decoration substrate 1140 is made to emit light, the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused in the main body part 1151 to make the design of the front sheet 1130 shine brightly. When the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 emits light, the light transmittance is higher than that of the main body portion 1151. Therefore, the portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152 in the pattern can be made to shine brighter than other portions, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Therefore, as compared to the conventional pachinko machine 1 that uses plywood or a transparent plate as the game panel, the design of the front sheet 1130 shines, so that the game area 5a that has never been seen before is varied. Since the player can show the pachinko machine 1 that self-luminesces with a certain brightness, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player. By shining part of the pattern brightly, it can be suggested to the player that an opportunity has arrived, so it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, a front sheet 1130 having a pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the specific portion 1152 is formed by recessing the panel plate 1110A (main body portion 1151) from the rear, so that a game is played. The identifying portion 1152 of the panel 1100 is invisible from the front. As a result, light is emitted to the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 by the light emission of the LED 1141 provided on the panel decoration substrate 1140, and the main body 1151 and the specific portion 1152 emit light with different brightness until they are executed. Can make it difficult for the player to be aware of the existence of the specific unit 1152, so that the player can be surprised by increasing the impact of the execution of the light emission effect (light emission decoration) of the game panel 1100. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by making me think that there is something good for.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is made white opaque and the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are full-color LEDs, the main color of the panel plate 1110A can be changed by changing the emission color of the LEDs 1141 as the game progresses. The part 1151 and the specific part 1152 can be made to emit light in various colors, and the light emission effect of various colors can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to use the light emission color. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation, and entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made white and opaque, the inside of the game area 5a provided in the front can be made bright, and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen. In addition, since the color of the decoration of the table unit 2000 provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be relatively highlighted, the decoration effect of the decoration can be strongly exerted, and the player's interest is strong. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can be attracted. In addition, as described above, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white, it is possible to improve the color development of the design of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface, and ensure the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130. Can be demonstrated.

Furthermore, in the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the concave portion 1115 is formed in the main body portion 1151 so that the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance is provided by changing the thickness, and the main body portion 1151 is formed. Since the same material as the part 1151 is used, the cost of the game panel 1100 can be reduced as compared with the case where a specific part having different light transmittance is inserted into the main part. Further, since the specific portion 1152 is formed by cutting, it is possible to easily change the thickness (light transmittance), the shape, and the position of the specific portion 1152 simply by changing the cutting program. , It is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily provide a specific portion 1152 with a higher staging effect, the game It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the person.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is made white and opaque, compared with the case where the panel plate is made transparent, even if the front sheet 1130 has a transparent portion in the design, it is planted in the panel plate 1110A. The roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N (portions inserted into the panel plate 1110A) can be hidden from the player side, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is made white and opaque, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 and the back lower front effect unit 3400 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A). It is possible to make a part of the lower back front decorative body 3410 invisible from the front side (player side). When the back-front peripheral decoration 3201 and the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A are decorated with light emission, light from the back-front peripheral decoration 3201 and the like is transmitted forward through the panel plate 1110A having a light-transmitting property. Therefore, the panel plate 1110A can be partially light-emitted and decorated, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 and the like provided behind. At this time, since the panel plate 1110A is white, when the back front peripheral decoration 3201 or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A is light-emitted, it is possible to transmit the light emission color as it is to the front. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player with a colorful light emission effect, present a variety of light emission effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made white and opaque, a part of the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front effector unit 3400 provided behind the panel plate 1110A is partially forward (player). Since it can be made invisible from the side), when the back lower front decorative body 3410 is raised to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110A, the back lower front decorative body passes through the opening 1112. The entire 3410 can be made visible from the front, and the player can be shown a movable effect in which a part of the back lower front decorative body 3410 is hidden or the entire object can be seen, and a variety of movable effects can be displayed by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the panel board 1110A is white and opaque and the surface of the rear panel decoration board 1140 is white, the panel decoration board 1140 can be made difficult to see through the panel board 1110A, and the game panel 1100( It is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a) from being deteriorated, and it is possible to reflect light from the side of the LED 1141 or the panel plate 1110A by the white panel decoration substrate 1140 to the front side, and the panel plate 1110A (front sheet). 1130) can be made to emit brighter light.

Further, the panel plate 1110A is made opaque (synthetic resin), and the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A protects the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, compared with the case where the panel plate 1110A is made transparent, an inexpensive synthetic resin (here, high-impact polystyrene) having a low grade such as abrasion resistance is used as a material of the panel plate 1110A. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is made white and opaque and the front sheet 1130 is provided with a pattern, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, it becomes easy to focus on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. By just looking at the panel plate 1110A, the game ball B naturally circulating in the game area 5a will be in focus. At this time, as described above, the panel plate 1110A (main body 1151 and specific portion 1152) is in a state of self-luminous by the light from the LED 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140, so that the inside of the game area 5a is Since the game ball B in circulation can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the movement of the game ball B can be changed. You can entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is formed by denting from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is flush with the front surface of the main body portion 1151, so The game ball B can be smoothly circulated in the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the front component member 1000 is transparent, the portion of the front component member 1000 that overlaps with the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction also has a pattern of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front face of the panel plate 1110A. Can be decorated with, and the player can see the light emission of the panel plate 1110A. In other words, since the front component 1000 is transparent, the entire panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) can be seen from the player side, and a wider area can be decorated (see FIG. 167).

In the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is shown to be composed of the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 is composed of one member. Also good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A obtained by cutting the flat plate-shaped base material is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the injection-molded panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) may be used. By injection molding the panel plate 1110A, it is possible to form the specific portion 1152 having a complicated shape or a sharp shape that cannot be obtained by cutting. Further, by using insert molding or two-color molding (multicolor molding) as molding of the panel plate 1110A, the specific portion 1152 is made of a material having a different light transmittance different from that of the main body portion 1151, and the sleeve 1154 and the filling portion 1156 are formed. It can be integrally formed or can be formed.

In the above embodiment, the main portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) is recessed to have a different thickness to form the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specific portion 1152 may be formed of a material having a light transmittance different from that of the main body portion 1151. Specifically, for example, a material having a light transmittance different from that of the main body 1151 is provided so as to penetrate the main body 1151 (the material is inserted, press-fitted, injected, insert-molded, two-color molded, etc.). Alternatively, the specifying portion 1152 may be formed.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the white opaque panel plate 1110A is shown, but the panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) is not limited to this. , An opaque (colored opaque) having a blue color, a yellow color, a mixed color color, etc.” and a “colorless or colored transparent material”. As the opaque panel plate 1110A, "the whole body including the inside is opaque", "the inside is opaque", "the inside is transparent and at least one surface is opaque", and "the translucent" Made of an opaque synthetic resin having transparency, "a transparent plate and an opaque plate having a light-transmitting property attached to each other", and "translucency on at least one surface of the transparent plate. "The one with the opaque film (cell) attached", "The back surface of the transparent plate that has been subjected to a crimping process with UV-curable ink", "The back surface of the transparent plate that has been sandblasted", etc. Are listed. In addition, as for the color, "red type", "blue type", "yellow type", "color mixture type (a mixture of a plurality of specific colors into a single color)" , “Multicolored ones (those in which each color is dispersed in a state such as a mottled pattern, a striped pattern, a polka dot pattern, and a geometric pattern)”, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the specific portion 1152 has a higher light transmittance than the main body portion 1151. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific portion 1152 has a lower light transmittance than the main body portion 1151. Good as a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is shown to be opaque, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body portion 1151 may be transparent. In this case, since the light transmittance does not change significantly even if the thickness of the main body 1151 is changed, a specific portion 1152 having a light transmittance different from that of the main body 1151 depending on a color or a material is provided. As a result, the specific portion 1152 can be made to appear floating in the air with respect to the transparent main body 1151, and the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated by the shape of the specific portion 1152. At this time, when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is illuminated with light, the specific portion 1152 that appears to float in the air emits light so that the specific portion 1152 emits light by itself, so that the player is strongly interested in the specific portion 1152. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be attracted and has a high appealing power to the player.

In the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A is irradiated with light. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110A is not limited to this. A decoration substrate may be provided outside the side surface or the end surface so that the side surface or the end surface of the panel plate 1110A is irradiated with light.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and the embodiment described later, the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110A, the panel plate 1110B, etc. of the game panel 1100 in which the obstacle nail N is planted is made of resin regardless of whether it is transparent or opaque (milk white) Since it is manufactured, compared with the case where a veneer-like plywood is used for the game panel, the accuracy of the interval between the obstacle nails N that have been planted is good and the secular change is small.

[10. Fourth embodiment of game board]
Next, a game board 5C of the fourth embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board, the rear surface sheet, and the panel decoration board in the game board of the fourth embodiment, which is disassembled and seen from the front. In the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made of a translucent white opaque material, and a rear surface sheet 1160 having a predetermined pattern on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, A panel decoration substrate 1170 having a plurality of LEDs 1171 capable of irradiating light from the rear to the front of the rear sheet 1160 is mounted on the front surface. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

The panel plate 1110B has the same shape as the game panel 1100 and the game panel 1100A described above, and in a state where the panel plate 1110B is detachably held from the front by a frame-shaped transparent panel holder 1120, it is transparent through the panel holder 1120. It is attached to the rear side of the member 1000.

The panel board 1110B of this embodiment is formed of milky white high-impact polystyrene (HIPS) as a white system.

In addition, as the translucent opaque of the panel plate 1110B, it is preferable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it is difficult to perform light emission decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it is difficult to obtain it as an opaque material. Further, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the member provided at the rear may be easily recognized, and the effect of concealment may not be sufficiently obtained.

Further, although the panel plate 1110B is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)) as a white system, “white Munsell value (N 9.5)”, “white Munsell value (2.5Y) 9.2/0.5)”, “Urban color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)”, “Production color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)”, “Lead white Munsell value (N 9)”, “Oyster” "White Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Gray white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", " Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", It may be a white type such as "Sakura color Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5)".

Further, although the panel plate 1110B is formed of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", " It may be formed of "polyethylene", "polypropylene", "glass", or the like. Further, although the panel plate 1110A is white based on the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), it may be white based on the colorant added to the transparent material.

As the opaque panel plate 1110B, "the whole body including the inside is opaque", "the inside part is opaque", "the inside is transparent and at least one surface is opaque", and "the translucent" Made of an opaque synthetic resin having transparency, "a transparent plate and an opaque plate having a light-transmitting property attached to each other", and "translucency on at least one surface of the transparent plate. "The one with the opaque film (cell) attached", "The back surface of the transparent plate that has been subjected to a crimping process with UV-curable ink", "The back surface of the transparent plate that has been sandblasted", etc. Also good.

Moreover, you may make it stick the front sheet which is excellent in abrasion resistance to the front surface of the panel board 1110B like the game board 5B of 3rd embodiment. The front sheet attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B may or may not have a design. As a result, the front sheet can protect the panel board 1110B from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a, so that the panel board 1110B is made of an inexpensive synthetic resin of low grade such as abrasion resistance (here Then, high impact polystyrene) can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

The rear sheet 1160 is attached to the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100. The rear sheet 1160 is formed of a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. Although illustration is omitted, the rear surface sheet 1160 is provided with a predetermined translucent pattern by printing. The rear surface sheet 1160 can project a pattern on the white opaque panel board 1110B by causing the LED 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 to emit light.

The rear sheet 1160 (the pattern thereof) may have a transparent portion or may have an opaque portion other than the front of the panel decoration substrate 1170.

The material of the rear sheet 1160 in this embodiment is "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", Examples thereof include “polyethylene resin”, “polystyrene resin”, “impact-resistant polystyrene resin” and “polyvinyl chloride”.

The panel decoration substrate 1170 is provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 at a location between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300 and a location at which the guide area 2710 is provided at the front. .. The panel decoration substrate 1170 is provided with white solder resist on its front and rear surfaces, and its front and rear surfaces are formed in white. The panel decoration substrate 1170 has a plurality of LEDs 1171 mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs 1171 are full-color LEDs with high brightness.

Although illustration is omitted, a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing the plurality of LEDs 1171 to emit light, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the panel decoration substrate 1170.

In the game board 5C of the present embodiment, in a normal state in which the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 are not lit, the entire front surface of the panel board 1110B is white with uniform brightness, and the front (player From the side), the pattern of the rear surface sheet 1160 and the panel decoration substrate 1170 provided on the rear side are not visible.

From this normal state, when a plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 are caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the light is radiated forward through the rear sheet 1160 and the panel plate 1110B. At this time, since the rear surface sheet 1160 is provided with a predetermined pattern, the patterns are projected by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 on the white opaque panel board 1110B, which is directed to the player. The design of the rear sheet 1160 can be made visible.

Thus, according to the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment, according to the progress of the game (for example, a special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005). By emitting a plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170, the pattern of the rear surface sheet 1160 can be projected on the panel board 1110B, so that the pattern is projected on the rear surface of the game area 5a in which the game ball B is distributed. By doing so, it is possible to show the game area 5a in which the pattern appears in the rear, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and at the same time, to the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can attract the interest of the player strongly and has a high appealing power to the player.

Further, since the pattern is projected on the panel plate 1110B as the game progresses, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 is used to project (project) the light-transmitting pattern of the rear sheet 1160 on the panel board 1110B. Since the light transmittance can be made different depending on the color or ink (paint) that is being used, the main portion 1151 and the specifying portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A in the game board 5B of the third embodiment can be changed by the pattern of the rear sheet 1160. The same function as can be added. More specifically, in the rear sheet 1160, for example, by increasing the light transmittance of the portion of the pattern and lowering the light transmittance of the portion other than the pattern, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 causes the light other than the pattern. It is possible to brightly illuminate the part of the, and brightly illuminate the part of the pattern. Therefore, also in the game board 5C of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as those of the game board 5B of the third embodiment as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B is white and the surface of the panel decoration substrate 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B is formed in white, the color of the panel decoration substrate 1170 is the same as that of the panel plate 1110B. It can be assimilated and made invisible from the front, and the player can be made unaware of the presence of (the pattern of) the panel decoration substrate 1170 and thus the rear surface sheet 1160. Then, when a plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 are made to emit light, the shadow of the design of the back sheet 1160 is projected on the panel plate 1110B, so that the design of the back sheet 1160 can be seen through the panel plate 1110B, and therefore the existence can be foreseen. By noticing the existence of (the pattern of) the rear surface sheet 1160 which was not present, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be strongly informed that an opportunity has come, and at the same time, a luminous effect with a higher staging effect can be obtained. It can be shown to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the rear surface sheet 1160 is formed of a sheet material, the rear surface sheet 1160 can be made relatively light, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, since the rear surface sheet 1160 is formed in a flat shape and provided so as to contact the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, a front-back space necessary for disposing the rear surface sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5C) is provided. Since it can be made as small as possible, it is easy to secure a space for relatively arranging other members (for example, a performance device, a performance display device, etc.) behind the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160). Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of showing more various effects to the player.

In the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear sheet 1160 may be provided behind the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B. You can As a result, it is possible to reduce the appearance of the picture on the rear sheet 1160 seen through the panel board 1110B, and the impact of the appearance of the picture when the picture is projected by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170. Can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided on the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear sheet 1160 may be formed on a part of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B. May be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is made transparent and the light transmitted through the pattern is projected on the panel plate 1110B, but the invention is not limited to this, and the pattern is opaque. As a property, the shadow of the design may be projected on the panel board 1110B.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1170 is shown, but the invention is not limited to this. The decoration unit capable of emitting light of the back unit 3000 provided behind the rear sheet 1160 (for example, The pattern on the rear sheet 1160 may be projected on the panel plate 1110B by light from the back front peripheral decoration 3201, the back lower front decoration 3410), the effect display device 1600, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one provided with the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration substrate 1170 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration substrate 1170, the rear of the panel plate 1110B is provided. It is also possible to project a decorative body provided on the display device, a performance image of the performance display device 1600, and the like onto the panel board 1110B. More specifically, a translucent decorative body provided behind the panel plate 1110B is used as a substitute for the pattern of the rear sheet 1160, and a decorative substrate on which an LED is mounted to light-embellish the decorative body is mounted on the panel. Instead of the decorative substrate 1170. Alternatively, the liquid crystal panel for displaying the effect image on the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the design of the rear sheet 1160, and the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the panel decoration substrate 1170 are used. Thereby, the same effect as the above can be achieved, and the pattern projected on the panel board 1110B moves by moving the decorative body or using the effect image as a moving image, so that a more effective light emission is achieved. The performance can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110B is shown to be white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may have a color. As for the colors, "red type", "blue type", "yellow type", "color mixture type (a mixture of a plurality of specific colors into a single color)", " Multicolored ones (those in which each color is dispersed in a state such as a mottled pattern, a striped pattern, a polka dot pattern, a geometrical pattern, etc.),"

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1170 is provided behind the panel plate 1110B and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160) is irradiated with light, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a decoration substrate may be provided outside the side surface or the end surface of the panel board 1110B so that the side surface or the end surface of the panel board 1110B is irradiated with light.

Further, in the above embodiment, the front sheet 1130 may be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B. At this time, the front sheet 1130 may be provided with a predetermined pattern corresponding to the pattern of the rear sheet 1160. Specifically, for example, when the shadow of the design of the rear sheet 1160 due to the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 is projected onto a portion of the front sheet 1130 excluding the characteristic portion of the design, When the LED 1171 is not lit, the design of the front sheet 1130 can be shown with the same brightness as a whole, and when the LED 1171 is lit according to the progress of the game, the design of the back sheet 1160 by the light from the LED 1171 is displayed. With the shadow, it is possible to brighten (brighten) a characteristic portion in the design of the front sheet 1130, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player. ..

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided between the panel plate 1110B and the panel decoration substrate 1170, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110B and the panel decoration substrate 1170 are not limited thereto. In the meantime, a projection body that is movable or deformable according to the progress of the game may be provided. As a result, the shadow of the projection body projected on the game panel 1100B can be moved or deformed by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170, so that the player can be greatly surprised. , It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game state) that will give the player an advantage may occur, and to increase the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

In addition, the above-mentioned projection body can be moved according to the progress of the game between the retracted position invisible from the front by the panel plate 1110B and the appearance position visible from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110B. It may be done. As a result, when the projection body is in the retracted position, it is invisible from the front due to the opaque panel board 1110B. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 are not emitting light, the projection body is projected on the panel board 1110B. Since no shadow is projected, it is possible to make the player less likely to notice the presence of the projection body. In this state, when the LED 1171 is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the light from the LED 1171 causes the shadow of the projection body to be projected on the panel plate 1110B, so that the transparent panel plate 1110B is used. The shadow of the projection body can be shown to the player, the existence of the projection body can be indirectly recognized by the player, and the shadow of the projection body is projected on the panel board 1110B, so that the player can be seen. It can be astonishing and attract the player's attention. Then, when the projection body is moved to the appearance position where it can be visually recognized from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110B in accordance with the progress of the game, the projection body can be directly seen through the opening 1112, so that the player is greatly Not only can it surprise and give a strong impact to the player, but also strongly suggest that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game state) in which the player has an advantage will occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, when the projection body is moved between the retracted position and the appearance position, the panel formed by the shadow of the projection body projected on the panel plate 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 at the retracted position. The decoration mode of the plate 1110B may be different from the decoration mode of the projection body itself (for example, a pattern applied to the projection body). Specifically, for example, when the outer shape of the projection body is set to the shape of the initial form of a predetermined character and the pattern of the final form of the character is applied to the front surface of the projection body, the LED 1171 is used when in the retracted position. Since the initial form of the character is projected on the panel plate 1110B by the light, the player can be made aware of the presence of the projection body (decorative body) of the character in the initial form. Then, when the projection body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position in accordance with the progress of the game, contrary to the expectation that the character in the initial form will appear, the character in the final form will appear. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, and it is possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous game state will be generated, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shadow of the pattern of the flat back sheet 1160 is projected on the panel plate 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170, but the invention is not limited to this. Instead of the rear sheet 1160, a three-dimensionally formed projection body may be provided and the shadow of the projection body may be projected on the panel plate 1110B. In this case, if the three-dimensional projection body is made to have a light-transmitting property, light from the LED 1171 causes light and shade to appear in the shadow of the projection body projected on the panel board 1110B, and the player can see the decoration of the projection body. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, if the projection body is made into a three-dimensional shape by pressure forming or vacuum molding of a sheet material, the projection body can be made lighter than its apparent size. Then, if this projection body can be moved in accordance with the progress of the game, it becomes possible to move the projection body with a small force (energy). Therefore, a drive motor or solenoid for moving the projection body is used. A small drive source having a small output can be used, a space required for driving can be relatively reduced, and an inexpensive drive source can be used. Further, since the projection body can be lightened, the projection body can be supported even by the support mechanism having a relatively low rigidity, and the support mechanism for the projection body can be easily downsized (space saving), and The support mechanism can be inexpensive. From this, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members, and by arranging the other members, a variety of effects can be shown to the player and entertaining, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided. This cost can be reduced.

[11. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
A plurality of panel boards 1110B of the game board 5C of the present embodiment are mounted on the game panel of the present invention, a rear sheet 1160 of the present embodiment is mounted on the projection body of the present invention, and on the front surface of the panel decoration substrate 1170 of the present embodiment. The LED 1171 corresponds to the light emitting means of the present invention, and the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B in the present embodiment corresponds to the protective sheet of the present invention.

[12. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5C, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a in which the game ball B flows is provided in the front is a translucent opaque white system. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear bright, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the LED provided on the pachinko machine 1 or the effect display device 1600 and the like can be used. When the panel board 1110B is irradiated with light, light from the lighting or the like in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or light from another pachinko machine, the light is diffused in the panel board 1110B. Thus, the panel plate 1110B can be made to appear as if it is bright and self-luminous. Therefore, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine that uses plywood or a transparent plate as the game panel 1100, it is possible to show the player a pachinko machine 1 that emits light in the game area 5a that has never been seen before. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made opaque with translucency, the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160) are not made to emit light. In the state (normal state), the back sheet 1160 (projection body) and the panel decoration substrate 1170 are invisible from the front due to the opaque panel plate 1110B, and the back sheet 1160 and the panel decoration substrate 1170 are not visible to the player. You can make it difficult to notice the existence. From this normal state, when the LED 1171 is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the shadow of the design of the rear sheet 1160 is projected (projected) on the panel plate 1110B by the light from the LED 1171, so that the translucency is provided. The shadow of the design of the rear surface sheet 1160 can be visually recognized by the player through the panel plate 1110B which is provided, and the panel plate 1110B can be made to emit light so as to have a light and dark. At this time, since the panel plate 1110B is made white and opaque, the light emission color of the LED 1171 and the color of the design of the rear surface sheet 1160 can be transmitted to the front, and the player can enjoy the colorful light emission effect. In addition, it is possible to present a variety of luminous effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. In this way, since the shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is projected behind the game area 5a, the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated with the shadow, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and A strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, the pattern of the rear sheet 1160, which is not visible in the normal state, can be visually recognized by the light from the LED 1171 that emits light as the game progresses, so there is a possibility that something is good for the player. It is possible to make people think of it, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is in a state where it self-luminesces due to the light from the outside or the panel plate 1110B emits light by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170. Since the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110B, the game ball B is circulating in the game area 5a. It is possible to make the game ball B easy to see, entertain the movement of the game ball B, and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the game ball B in the game area 5a can be easily seen, it is possible to easily make a fine adjustment of the driving strength of the game ball B, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be performed. The original game of the pachinko machine 1 to be devised can be enjoyed.

Further, since the rear surface sheet 1160 is made of a sheet material, the rear surface sheet 1160 can be made relatively light in weight, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed in a flat shape so as to contact the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, the space in the front-rear direction necessary for disposing the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 can be made as small as possible. it can. Therefore, in the rear of the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160), it is possible to easily secure a space for relatively arranging other members (for example, a rendering device, a rendering display device, etc.), and a wider variety of renderings can be achieved. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be shown to a player and entertain the player, and the back sheet 1160 can be easily made inexpensive, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made of a light-transmissive and opaque one (synthetic resin), compared with the case where the panel plate 1110B (game panel 1100) is made transparent, the grade is higher. Low synthetic resin can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel board 1110B is opaque, the bases of the plurality of obstacle nails N (portions inserted into the panel board 1110B) that are planted in the panel board 1110B are compared with the case where the panel board 1110B is made transparent. It can be hidden from the side, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Furthermore, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is white, the color of the ornament provided on the pachinko machine 1 can be relatively highlighted, and the ornament effect of the ornament is strongly exerted. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the panel plate 1110B is white, when the front sheet 1130 having a pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B, the coloring of the pattern provided on the front sheet 1130 can be improved. Therefore, the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be surely exhibited.

Further, by attaching the front sheet 1130 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel plate 1110B from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to use an inexpensive material having a low grade such as abrasion resistance as the material of the panel plate 1110B, and it is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the processing for hiding the wiring and the like behind the panel plate 1110B. That is, in the transparent game panel, in order to improve the appearance, it is necessary to hide the wiring and the like behind the game panel, but in the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110B is opaque, so that the rear of the panel plate 1110B is There is no need for a process to hide the wiring, etc. Thereby, as compared with the case where the game panel (panel plate) is made transparent, a member for hiding the wiring and the like behind the panel plate 1110B is separately provided, and the wiring and the like are devised so that it is hard to see. It is not necessary to do so, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5B, the front area 1130 provided with the game area 5a in which the game balls B are distributed and provided with a predetermined pattern is attached to the front surface. A panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is provided on a portion corresponding to a white main body 1151 having a light-transmitting property and a light transmittance higher than that of the main body 1151 and a pattern (a characteristic part of the pattern) of the front sheet 1130. Since it is configured with the specific portion 1152 provided, when the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body portion 1151 on the panel decoration substrate 1140 is caused to emit light in accordance with the progress of the game, the second LED 1141b emits light. Light can be diffused in the main body 1151 to brightly illuminate the design of the front sheet 1130, and it can appear as if it is self-luminous, and also emits the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152. By doing so, since the light transmittance is higher than that of the main body portion 1151, the amount of light going straight is increased, so that the portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152 in the pattern can be made to shine brighter than the other portions, and the player's interest is strong. Can be attracted. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or a transparent plate as the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the game area that has never been seen before due to the design of the front sheet 1130 shining. Since the pachinko machine 1 in which the inside of 5a emits self-luminous light with various brightness can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player is provided. In addition to the fact that part of the design is bright and shining, it can be suggested to the player that an opportunity has arrived, and it is possible to make the player think that something is good. , It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is applied as a design of the front sheet 1130, and a specific portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic part of the character (for example, eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.). In the case where the specific portion 1152 is provided, when the light is emitted from the rear side to the front portion of the specific portion 1152, the characteristic portion of the character can be made to shine brightly by the specific portion 1152, which can give a strong impact to the player. , It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly and to make the player think that something is good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline of interest. You can

At this time, if the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is formed by cutting, the thickness of the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 can be easily made different in the opaque panel plate 1110A. The specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance can be formed. Further, since it is possible to easily change the thickness (light transmittance), the shape, and the position of the specific portion 1152 by changing the cutting program for cutting, it is possible to change the design or the model. The pachinko machine 1 that can be easily dealt with, can suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and can easily provide the specific portion 1152 having a higher staging effect, and has a high appealing power to the player. Can be provided.

Further, when the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is formed by cutting, a nail hole (prepared hole) for implanting an obstacle nail N in the panel plate 1110A, a center accessory for the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A). It is possible to perform cutting at the timing of cutting the opening 1112 penetrating in the front and back for attaching the front unit 2000 such as 2500 or the lower right unit 2400. Accordingly, it is not necessary to perform a setup change for cutting the specific portion 1152, and the specific portion 1152 can be processed with a slight increase in processing time, and an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. be able to.

On the other hand, when the game panel 1100 (including the panel plate 1110A) is formed by injection molding, the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittances can be integrally formed at the same time. Further, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a transparent material can be insert-molded or multi-color molded in a portion (concave portion 1115) where the specific portion 1152 thinner than the main body portion 1151 is formed. The thickness of the main body portion 1151 and the portion of the specific portion 1152 can be the same, and by eliminating the recessed portion, it is possible to prevent the strength and rigidity of the game panel 1100 from decreasing. Further, in this case, since the main body part 1151 and the part of the specific part 1152 have the same thickness, it is possible to implant the obstacle nail N also in the part of the specific part 1152, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the specific part 1152 is increased. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be enhanced and which has a higher decorative effect and effect.

In addition, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the amount of protrusion of the core pin or the mandrel into the cavity for forming the portion (recess 1115) that is recessed by the specific portion 1152 that is thinner than the main body 1151 is changed. The thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be changed only by performing the above operation, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed.

Further, when the gaming panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a finer shape or a sharper shape is formed in comparison with the cutting process, with respect to the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, the shape of the specific portion 1152 in front view, and the like. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide the specific unit 1152 that can further enhance the effect, can entertain the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, and have a high appealing power to the player. Can be provided.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is provided invisible from the front, light is emitted to the panel plate 1110A by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 1141 provided on the panel decoration substrate 1140. Until the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152 perform the light emission effect of shining with different brightness, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the specific part 1152. Therefore, the light emission effect of the panel board 1110A ( It is possible to increase the impact of the execution of the light emitting decoration) and surprise the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game by making the player think that something is good.

Further, since the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is white-based opaque and the specific portion 1152 is invisible from the front, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A has a uniform white color, and thus the game area 5a. It is possible to make the inside look bright, and to make it easy to see the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a, and at the same time, to provide a decorative body (for example, the starting opening unit 2100 or the center accessory 2500) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Since the color of the table unit 2000) can be made relatively noticeable, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be strongly exerted and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Further, as described above, since the front surface of the panel plate 1110A has a uniform white color, it is possible to improve the color development of the pattern applied to the front sheet 1130, and to reliably exert the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130. be able to.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is made thinner than the main body portion 1151 so as to have different light transmittance, a recess such as a blind hole or a groove is formed with respect to the main body portion 1151. By forming 1115 and making the thickness different, the specific portions 1152 having different light transmittances can be easily provided. As a result, the specific portion 1152 can be made of the same material as the main body portion 1151, and the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) can be compared with the case where the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance is inserted into the main body portion 1151. The cost can be reduced. At this time, since the main body 1151 and the specific portion 1152 are made to have different thicknesses by cutting, the thickness (light transmittance) and shape of the specific portion 1152 can be changed by simply changing the cutting program. Since it is possible to easily change the position, it is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and to further improve the effect. It is possible to easily provide the specifying unit 1152, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

In addition, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than the main body portion 1151, when the second LED 1141b of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind the main body portion 1151 emits light, it diffuses in the main body portion 1151. The diffused light from the second LED 1141b is blocked by the recessed portion to form the specific portion 1152, and only the portion of the main body 1151 in front of the second LED 1141b can emit light. Become. Therefore, for example, when an annular groove is formed in the main body portion 1151 and the portion of the groove is the specific portion 1152, the second portion provided behind the portion inside the circular annular specific portion 1152 of the main body portion 1151. When the LED 1141b is made to emit light, only the portion inside the specific portion 1152 can be made to emit bright light, and the portion outside the specific portion 1152 can be made dark. In other words, it is possible to make only a desired part of the main body 1151 emit light by the shape of the specific portion 1152 and the arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140, and thus the pachinko machine 1 capable of executing more diverse light emission effects. Can be provided.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than the main body portion 1151 and the front surface is flush with the front surface of the main body portion 1151, the game ball B is located in the front game area 5a. It can be distributed smoothly, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than the main body portion 1151, when the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 has a three-dimensional relief shape imitating a predetermined character, item, logo, etc. Since the thickness of the portion 1152 varies so as to follow the shape of the rear surface, when the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 on the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light, the portion of the specific portion 1152 transmits light. Due to the different degrees, when viewed from the front (the player's side), light with a shade along the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 can be seen, and predetermined light is emitted by the first LED 1141a on the front surface of the panel board 1110A. It is possible to project a character or the like, and it is possible to provide a light-emission effect capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is made white and opaque, the panel plate 1110A has a transparent portion even if it has a transparent portion as compared with the case where the panel plate 1110A is made transparent. The roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in 1110A (portions inserted into the panel plate 1110A) can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, since the main body of the panel plate 1110A is made opaque, a decorative body (for example, a back front peripheral decorative body 3201) provided behind the panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) and the like from the front side (player side). It can be invisible. Then, when the decoration provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 is decorated with light emission, the light from the decoration is transmitted to the front through the main body 1151 (panel board 1110A) having a light-transmitting property. It is possible to partially decorate with light emission and improve the appearance in the game area 5a. Further, since the light-emitting decoration of the decoration body which can be seen through the panel board 1110A can be seen, the player can be made aware of the existence of the decoration body provided in the rear, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. At the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Since the main body 1151 is white and opaque, when a decorative body or the like provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 is light-emitted, the light-emission color can be transmitted to the front and the color can be changed. It is possible to entertain a rich light emitting effect to the player and present a variety of light emitting effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get tired and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, since the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is made opaque, the decorative body (for example, the lower back front decorative body 3410) provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) is forward ( Since it can be invisible from the player's side), when the decoration is moved to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110A, the decoration is seen from the front through the opening 1112. It is possible to make it visible, and it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the ornament is hidden or appear, and it is possible to present a variety of movable effects to the player, making it hard for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is made opaque (synthetic resin), it is possible to use a synthetic resin of a lower grade than that when the panel plate 1110A is made transparent. Further, since the front sheet 1130 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Inexpensive materials with low wear resistance can be used. Because of this, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is white and opaque and the surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140 is white, it is difficult to see the panel decoration substrate 1140 through the main body 1151 (panel plate 1110A). It is possible to prevent the appearance of the panel plate 1110A (in the game area 5a) from being deteriorated, and to reflect the light from the plurality of LEDs 1141 and the outside from the front side by the white panel decoration substrate 1140. The panel plate 1110A can be made to emit light more brightly.

Further, since the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made white opaque and the front sheet 1130 is provided with a pattern, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, the game panel 1100( Since it becomes easy to focus on the front surface of the main body portion 1151), just looking at the game panel 1100 will naturally focus on the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a. At this time, as described above, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1141 provided on the panel decoration substrate 1140 causes the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A to emit light by themselves. Since the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110A, it is easy to visually recognize the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A (main body portion 1151) in the game panel 1100 is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the process for hiding the wiring and the like behind the panel plate 1110A. That is, in the case of a transparent panel plate, in order to improve the appearance, it is necessary to hide the wiring behind the panel plate, but in the present embodiment, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque, the rear panel plate 1110A does not need to be covered. There is no need for a process to hide the wiring, etc. As a result, as compared with the case where the game panel (panel plate) is made transparent, a member for hiding the wiring and the like behind the panel plate 1110A is separately provided, and the wiring and the like are devised so that it is hard to see. It is not necessary to do so, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine as the game machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game is a pachi-slot machine or a game in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. It may be applied to a machine, and even in this case, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained. Further, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which a player does not touch the game ball B and a game machine called a management game machine.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5A Gaming board 5B Gaming board 5a Gaming area 1000 Pre-configuration member 1100 Gaming panel 1110B Panel board (gaming panel)
1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1130 Front sheet (protective sheet)
1160 Rear sheet (projection body)
1170 Panel decorative substrate 1171 LED (light emitting means)

Claims (1)

An opaque flat opaque game panel having a game area in which a game medium is distributed in the front,
A light emitting means provided behind the game panel and capable of irradiating light forward according to the progress of the game,
A game machine comprising: a projection body provided between the light emitting means and the game panel.